Battle of Ideas 2012 festival drinks reception

Saturday 20 October, 6.45pm until 9.00pm, Conservatory

FESTIVAL RECEPTION
The Guildhall School of Music & Drama is one of the world’s leading conservatoires and drama schools, offering musicians, actors, stage managers and theatre technicians an inspiring environment in which to develop as artists and professionals.

19.15
Welcome speeches by Claire Fox (director, Academy of Ideas) and guests.

19.30-19.50
The Quartet from Guildhall School of Music & Drama will perform

  • Debussy: String Quartet, 1st mvt
  • Beethoven: String Quartet op 18. No. 1, 2nd mvt

Jonathan Bloxham cello
Elitsa Bogdanova viola
Caroline Simon violin
Viktor Stenhjem viola

Throughout the evening: jazz provided by the Sam Braysher Trio

Speakers
Louise Jeffreys
director of programming, Barbican; former, Head of Theatre and Arts Projects, Barbican; former technical director, English National Opera

John Knight
executive vice president, Global Head of Strategy & Business Developments, Statoil

Christine Thompson
manager, UK government relations, SABMiller

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Sean Gregory director, Creative Learning, Barbican/Guildhall School of Music & Drama
Ayca Ibrahim coordinator, department of chamber music
Session partners





in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Can technology set you free?
Can technology set you free?

Thursday 22 November, 6.00pm until 8.00pm, Royal Academy of Engineering, 3 Carlton House Terrace, London SW1Y 5DG

Tickets £5/£3. Available here.

Prometheus was severely punished for giving fire and the arts to mankind, but his loss of liberty was our gain. Just what though is the relationship between technology and freedom? Did washing machines liberate women, or was it feminists who demanded washing machines? In what senses are we – in a gadget-filled world – freer today than 50 or 500 years ago? What might it mean, even, when we talk of being made free?

For the developing world, technology has been named ‘the single most transformative tool for development’, while others claim it will destroy – not liberate – traditional communities. Our lives are enriched by technology but we also blame it for taking away our autonomy. The smartphone that makes the daily commute a creative moment is also the device that makes you available 24/7 to the demands of your boss, and indeed your friends. Can we ever be truly free if privacy is a thing of the past, where technology has enabled the accumulation of masses of personal data? Even when there is so much potential to exploit, critics point out that its potential to emancipate humanity might be illusory. But technology is all around us. It makes things faster, smaller, cheaper, and improves how we live, work and entertain. It can empower – removing the shackles of disability and dependency and the housewife’s daily graft. Technology has made travel to the moon and the bottom of the oceans possible, given us artificial hearts and oral contraceptives, mapped our genetic code and even allowed the blind to see again and amputees to run in the Olympics.

Nevertheless, we often seem incapable of handling the change new technology brings. Does it cause a loss of autonomy – or are we more fearful of our inability to withstand change? Should we be much more demanding of what we could get from new kinds of technology? What does the debate about technology say about our sense of purpose and ambition? Perhaps in answering that, we can begin to answer the question of whether or not technology can liberate us, or if the liberated are in the best position to make use of what technology offers.

Speakers
Dr Mo Ibrahim
global expert in mobile communications; founder, Celtel International; one of TIME's 100 most influential people

Dr Aleks Krotoski
academic and journalist; presenter, BBC Radio 4's The Digital Human and the Guardian's Tech Weekly podcast.

Professor Andy Miah
chair in science communication & digital media, University of Salford

Dr Martyn Thomas
vice-president for external affairs, Royal Academy of Engineering

Professor Judy Wajcman
head, Sociology Department, LSE; research associate, Oxford Internet Institute

James Woudhuysen
visiting professor, London South Bank University

Chair:
David Bowden
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer

Produced by
David Bowden associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer
Manisha Lalloo assistant manager, public engagement, Royal Academy of Engineering
Dr Lesley Paterson head, communications and engagement, Royal Academy of Engineering
Recommended readings
China turns to robots as labour costs rise

Automation and robotics are increasingly seen by the farsighted Hong Kong and Taiwan entrepreneurs – who own and operate many of the factories in the province of Guangdong that first sparked the boom in the country’s exports – as a way to keep China’s industrial base competitive.

Rahul Jacob and Sarah Mishkin, Financial Times, 4 October 2012

A Robot With a Reassuring Touch

Baxter, the first product of Rethink Robotics, an ambitious start-up company in a revived manufacturing district here, is a significant bet that robots in the future will work directly with humans in the workplace.

John Markoff, New York Times, 18 September 2012

Skilled Work, Without the Worker

At the Philips Electronics factory on the coast of China, hundreds of workers use their hands and specialized tools to assemble electric shavers. That is the old way. At a sister factory in the Dutch countryside, 128 robot arms do the same work with yoga-like flexibility.

John Markoff, New York Times, 18 August 2012

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: The law’s drugs problem: the challenge of legal highs
The law’s drugs problem: the challenge of legal highs

Thursday 15 November, 5.00pm until 7.00pm, Wolfson Lecture Theatre, Institute of Psychiatry, Denmark Hill Campus, King’s College London, 10 Cutcombe Road, London SE5 9RJ

Tickets: FREE; no booking required.


Few would claim existing drug policies have prevented the widespread use of illicit drugs. On the contrary, many believe prohibition has actually encouraged profiteering and increased the harm caused by drug use. Plenty of politicians have openly declared that the so-called ‘war on drugs’ has failed, and that policy should be shaped by pragmatic concerns rather than moralistic zeal. Policymakers’ historic failure to manage psychoactive substances is especially troubling because they now face new challenges in the form of so-called legal highs. Drugs with names like Mexxy, Dimethocaine, 5-IAI, Silver Bullet, and many more are not covered by existing legislation, but have similar effects to those that are. The number of legal drugs available seems to be growing rapidly, and the harm caused by them is rising accordingly. The UK government has made it clear that doing nothing is not an option. Simply asking what should be done, however, forces us to confront the failure of policies meant to deal with more familiar substances like cannabis, crack and heroin. If all new highs become are simply banned by being brought under the purview of the ageing Misuse of Drugs Act, will they be controlled any better than they are now? If criminalising drug use has been seen to fail, should the challenge of legal highs be seen as an opportunity rather than a crisis? A chance to make a much-needed distinction between substance abuse and the relatively harmless recreational use of drugs, legal or otherwise?

Tobacco, alcohol, medicines and even food can all cause harm and provide profit for black marketeers, but in none of these cases are consumers automatically at risk of arrest as with cannabis or heroin. This year the All Party Parliamentary Policy Group for Drug Policy Reform launched an inquiry into how alternative methods of regulation might control new drugs, perhaps licensing them on the model of tobacco and alcohol. Nevertheless, there are big fears that letting go of the simple stick of criminal punishment might unleash a popular appetite for drugs, with the implication that the death toll will rise. Is this true, and if so, why are so many people so keen to pop animal tranquilisers and plant food for kicks? If the licensing model is too risky, how can we avoid the failure of our old ‘war on drugs’? Is banning legal highs the only option? Or should the law back off?

Produced in partnership with Maudsley Debates.

Speakers
Dr Owen Bowden-Jones
consultant psychiatrist and chair, Faculty of Addictions, Royal College of Psychiatrists

Dr Michael Fitzpatrick
writer on medicine and politics; author, The Tyranny of Health

Tim Hollis
chief constable, Humberside Police; chair, ACPO Drugs Committee

Molly Meacher
chair, All Party Parliamentary Group on Drug Policy Reform; former Chair, East London NHS Foundation Trust; chair, Clinical Ethics Committee, CNWL NHS Trust, 2004-2009

Maryon Stewart
author and broadcaster; pioneer in non-drug medicine; Founder, Angelus Foundation; nutritionist, C4's Model Behaviour; presenter, The Really Useful Health Show

Chair:
David Bowden
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer

Produced by
David Bowden associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer
Dr Jonathan Hurlow psychiatrist and researcher, All Party Parliamentary Group
Recommended readings
Drugs - Without the Hot Air: Minimising the Harms of Legal and Illegal Drugs

Prof Nutt puts the case for an evidence-based scientific approach to drugs. In straightforward languages for the lay person, he explains what drugs are, how they affect the body and the mind, and why people take them and get addicted to them. He shows how we can quantify the overall harms of a drug, addressing issues from direct danger of death, through to environmental, financial and family factors, to obtain a true indication of the overall effect of a drug.

David Nutt, UIT Cambridge, May 2012

The challenge of new psychoactive substances

This paper aims to set out some of the policy and public health issues raised by the appearance of a wide range of emergent psychoactive substances of diverse origin, effect and risk profile (commonly referred to as ‘legal highs’).

Adam Winstock & Chris Wilkins, Drugs and Democracy, 31 October 2011

Taking drugs seriously: a Demos and UKDPC report on legal highs

In 2009, a previous record 24 new synthetic psychoactive substances were identified. There are now over 600 substances controlled under the Misuse of Drugs Act (MDA) in the UK. With the emergence of manufactured ‘legal highs’, this number is set to increase drastically. As the MDA turns 40 years old this year, this report investigates whether twentieth-century drug control legislation is fit for the twenty-first-century drugs market.

UK Drug Policy Commission, 15 May 2011

Why we shouldn't legalise drugs

The harm caused to a minority of users by illegal drugs is not a good reason to relax the law

Alexander Linklater, Prospect, 1 November 2010

GBL: 'Why haven't they banned it?'

Today, Maryon Stewart, mother of 21-year-old student Hester Stewart, who died earlier this year, will demand that Alan Johnson, the Home Secretary, categorises GBL with the notorious date-rape drug GHB and has it banned

Neil Tweedie, Daily Telegraph, 24 June 2009

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: The triumph of the city?
The triumph of the city?

Wednesday 14 November, 6.00pm until 8.00pm, Q 110 – Die Deutsche Bank der Zukunft in Berlin, Friedrichstraße 181, 10117 Berlin

The debate will be in English.

Tickets: FREE but registration required in advance.

For more information, and to register, please call Novo Argumente +49 699 7206 701 or email johannes.richardt@novo-argumente.com.


Cities are the greatest creations of humanity Daniel Libeskind, Architect

Megacities are exposed to all the classic risks, but their exposure and vulnerability are disproportionate. They create risks of new dimensions - megarisks Stefan Heyd, former Chair of the Board of Management, Münchener Rück

Will the 21st century go down in history as the century when the city triumphed? For the first time in human history, more than half of the world`s population now lives in cities, and it is estimated that by 2030 the proportion will rise to 60% or five billion people. Much of this urban growth is taking place at breathtaking speed in Asia where the likes of Chongqing in China has grown rapidly over the past two decades to become a city of some 30 million people. Indeed the Far Eastern Economic Review predicts that by the middle of the century Asia alone will have at least 10 ‘hypercities’ of 20 million people or more.

The United Nations has heralded cities as ‘dynamic centres of creativity and culture’ while Harvard academic Edward Glaeser claims they will make us ‘richer, smarter, greener, healthier and happier’. Nevertheless, in the west we often seem unconvinced by such claims. At a time when many believe that ‘small is beautiful’ and call for ‘sustainable’ and ‘appropriate’ growth, megacities and other emerging centres of the east and south are often viewed with apprehension. Within German cities too, changes related to urban development and regeneration are frequently viewed suspiciously. Not only have large infrastructural projects such as the expansion of Berlin and Frankfurt airports and the reconstruction of Stuttgart railway station provoked vociferous protests, but seemingly innocuous schemes such as a new concert hall in Hamburg, have become mired in controversy. In Berlin the closure of the iconic Tacheles arts centre is said to symbolise the replacement of traditional neighbourhoods and long standing communities by a new glassy, more corporate cityscape.

So do cities and urban development strengthen or weaken our societies? Is it the case, as sceptics suggest, that as cities develop, social exclusion, and urban blight are likely to grow with them? On the other hand, if as claimed cities are dynamic centres of innovation that foster humans’ ability to learn from one another, then why are we not building big new cities in Germany?  What role might modern architecture and technology play in the development of the city of the future?

Speakers
Alastair Donald
associate director, Future Cities Project; architecture programme manager, British Council

Jim Hudson
writer on architectural and urban issues; blogger, www.architectureinberlin.com

Aljoscha Hofmann
assistant professor, TU Berlin

Anli Serfontein
journalist; author, Basteln, Wandern and Putzen: from South Africa to Trier

Professor Hermann Voesgen
subject leader project management; University of Applied Sciences Potsdam

Chair:
Sabine Beppler-Spahl
chair, Freiblickinstitut e.V; CEO, Sprachkunst36

Produced by
Sabine Beppler-Spahl chair, Freiblickinstitut e.V; CEO, Sprachkunst36
Recommended readings
Triumph of the City

In Triumph of the City, Glaeser takes us around the world and into the mind of the modern city – from Mumbai to Paris to Rio to Detroit to Shanghai, and to any number of points in between – to reveal how cities think, why they behave in the manners that they do, and what wisdom they share with the people who inhabit them.

Edward Glaeser, Pan, 16 February 2012

The Lure of the City: from slums to suburbs

Cities, by their very nature, are a mass of contradictions. They can be at once visually stunning, culturally rich, exploitative and unforgiving.

Austin Williams and Alastair Donald (editors), Pluto Press, 20 September 2011


Session partners



in association with


Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Can we still have faith in the academy?
Can we still have faith in the academy?

Tuesday 13 November, 6.00pm until 7.30pm, The New School, Theresa Lang Community and Student Center, 55 West 13th Street, 2nd floor, New York. NY 10011

Education is regarded as vitally important in a number of ways: training workers for the global market, helping young people to develop a positive sense of identity; and serving as a pathway to upward social mobility. Yet, are these aims true to what higher education should be? Is there more to education than just becoming an informed citizen, getting a job or taking tests? The past hundred years and more have seen wide shifts in the model of American higher education: put crudely, from a system mainly based on colleges providing a uniform and largely traditional education, especially in the liberal arts, to a university system geared towards research and specialisation, with a bent to the hard sciences and the law. But is the university still a place where we pursue the truth for its own sake?

For many, such an old-fashioned notion is more suited to eccentric religious foundations like Oral Roberts University than the modern campus, where relativistic notions of truth and value are widespread, and there is even little consensus on the content of the curriculum. The bewildering array of electives available can be seen as liberating the student from the dead hand of tradition, but when students are expected to know what they want to read, perhaps one traditional role of the university is neglected: precisely to educate a generation of young people in what they don’t even know they need to know. Their unknown unknowns if you like.

Just what should the balance be between meeting the requirements of today’s fast-paced world and teaching the best of yesterday’s? Should it require all students to know at least some of the same things? Is student choice an aspect of academic freedom, or is educational anarchy a testament to the decline of professorial authority? Is there a value in common knowledge, or are some things best left to specialists? Is the academy today still somewhere that should aspire with Emerson to ‘get the soul out of bed’?

Speakers
Andrew Delbanco
Mendelson Family Chair of American Studies and Julian Clarence Levi Professor in the Humanities, Columbia University; author, College: what it was, Is, and should be

Anya Kamenetz
senior writer, Fast Company; author, Generation Debt

Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination

Professor David Scobey
executive dean, New School for Public Engagement, New York

Chair:
Alan Miller
chairman, Night Time Industries Association (NTIA)

Produced by
Alan Miller chairman, Night Time Industries Association (NTIA)
Recommended readings
Declaration of independence

The Ivy League's autonomy has allowed its members to conquer the world. The UK must loosen the reins on its universities and establish an equivalent.

Terence Kealey, Times Higher Education, 11 October 2012

Death by Degrees

Like the market for skin care products, the market for credentials is inexhaustible: as the bachelor’s degree becomes democratized, the master’s degree becomes mandatory for advancement.

The Editors, n+1, 19 June 2012

The university: still dead

Andrew Delbanco’s insightful new book on the history and future of the American college exposes an institution that has no idea what it should be.

Angus Kennedy, spiked, 25 May 2012

College: What it Was, Is, and Should Be

In a brisk and vivid historical narrative, Delbanco explains how the idea of college arose in the colonial period from the Puritan idea of the gathered church, how it struggled to survive in the nineteenth century in the shadow of the new research universities, and how, in the twentieth century, it slowly opened its doors to women, minorities, and students from low-income families.

Andrew Delbanco, Princeton University Press, 20 March 2012

Civic Engagement and the Copernican Moment David Scobey, Imagining America, 21 September 2011

AC Grayling has caricatured British universities. No wonder they're fuming

The New College of Humanities founder has exposed higher education as a luxury consumable for the middle classes

Simon Jenkins, Guardian, 10 June 2011

Generation Debt

How Our Future Was Sold Out for Student Loans, Bad Jobs, Nobenefits, and Tax Cuts for Rich Geezers--And How to Fight Back

Anya Kamenetz, Riverhead, 2006


Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Whatever happened to equality?
Whatever happened to equality?

Saturday 10 November, 8.00am until 2.45pm, Newcastle University, Newcastle upon Tyne NE1 7RU

Tickets: FREE but booking essential. Please see www.thegreatdebate.org.uk


Whatever Happened to Equality? is a day of active debate and documentary-making. Participants will take a critical look at how the discourse of equality has changed in recent times. The day includes a film-making training workshop for young people, who will be encouraged to video their thoughts, and have the opportunity to gain hands-on experience of working behind and in front of the camera. Videos will be published on the internet.

An introductory workshop will introduce interview formats and techniques, capture on film participants’ initial reflections on the topics and brief them on doing a multi-camera shoot of an event.

There will be two panel debates, open to a wider audience of all ages, each introduced by a panel of experts. Participants will be given plenty of opportunities to ask questions and make points from the floor:

Equality, Equity and the dispossessed
The notions of equality and equity are widely used and yet people’s understanding of their meaning differs hugely. This can make it difficult to know what people are talking about when they argue for greater equality - is it equal rights? Equal access to education? Equal opportunity? Equal pay? All of the above? This session will interrogate these differences and ask in what contexts is a more equal society a better one?

Speakers include:
Dr Vikki Boliver, Durham University
Dr Geoff Payne, Newcastle University
Chris Snowdon, author, The Spirit Level Delusion

Equality versus Difference
Why has difference replaced equality as the central theme of feminist and anti-racist politics over the past three decades? What has been lost and gained by this shift of emphasis?

Speakers include:
Dr Davina Cooper, author, Challenging Diversity: Rethinking Equality and the Value of Difference
Dolan Cummings, associate fellow, Academy of Ideas
David Goodhart, Director, Demos

Film-workshop participants will video the debates and interview speakers and audience members. A closing session will encourage them to reflect on the discussions and ideas to which they have been exposed; they will record final interviews with each other, capturing new thoughts resulting from the day’s events, and a demonstration of how to upload material to the web will be given.


For further information and tickets please see the Great Debate website.


Produced by
Dr Caspar Hewett Lecturer in civil engineering at Newcastle University, and director of The Great Debate
Recommended readings
Hiring hotties

When can an employer prefer the attractive over the homely?

Economist, 21 July 2012

Methodist minister Haley Preston 'not employed by God'

Appeal Court judges have ruled the Reverend Haley Preston, of Cornwall, is employed by the Church rather than God. The Methodist Church had claimed that ministers were not ordinary employees but

BBC News, 20 December 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Satire today: still kicking against the pricks?
Satire today: still kicking against the pricks?

Monday 29 October, 7.00pm until 9.00pm, Shoreditch House, Ebor Street, Shoreditch, London, E1 6AW

Tickets: free and ticketed.

For more information email davebowden@Instituteofideas.com


With the ‘omnishambles’ coalition and anger at the cuts, satire seems to be undergoing a renaissance. Under New Labour, argued John O’Farrell, left-leaning comics seemed as interested in mocking Vicky Pollard-style chavs as the government. Yet Armando Ianucci’s expletive-laden The Thick of It has become part of the political lexicon while Channel 4’s 10 O’Clock Live seems to have established itself as a youthful rival to more established satirical shows. On stage, Laura Wade’s dissection of the Bullingdon Club has seen Posh join an adaptation of Yes, Minister as a theatrical hit. Meanwhile, the likes of Uncaged Monkeys have seen leading scientists, philosophers and self-proclaimed ‘geeks’ become a hit on the comedy circuit, taking pot-shots at ‘bad’ science, organised religion and other apparent symptoms of contemporary irrationalism. Comedians such as Marcus Brigstocke, Steve Coogan and Stephen Fry are regularly invited on to current affairs programmes to take a wry, sideways look at everything from climate change to press regulation. And despite the occasional backlash against their perceived smugness, they are generally taken seriously as political commentators.

Yet some query how far contemporary comedy lives up to satire’s unofficial slogan to ‘afflict the comfortable and comfort the afflicted’. Comedians who proudly defend their right to free speech when mocking religious fundamentalism or political correctness can simultaneously be seen demanding that others should be censored when joking about other controversial issues around disability, racism and sexual violence. There was widespread outrage when Paul Chambers was charged for joking about blowing up an airport, yet relative silence when drunk student Liam Stacey was jailed for tweeting unpleasant racist humour about Fabrice Muamba. The Thick of It and Posh are quoted and celebrated by Labour ministers in opposition: despite many being part of the same Oxbridge-educated political establishment. Similarly, whether young or old, the subjects of irreverence – greedy bankers, sleazy politicians, the folly of the public and, of course, the Daily Mail – have a depressingly familiar ring.

Has satire been blunted by a conformist attitude to ‘acceptable’ speech or does it still possess a real bite? Does satire generally confirm existing prejudices or can it still shock and challenge received wisdom? Are there targets and topics which are arguably getting off lightly? How far can satire go in a society which is increasingly uncertain of who it respects and what values it shares? And having given a licence to comedians to mock more serious public figures, are we in danger of suspending our critical faculties when they hold forth?

Speakers
Christian Adams
political cartoonist, Daily Telegraph and Sunday Telegraph

Dr Tim Black
editor, Spiked Review

Stephanie Calman
writer and broadcaster; author, Confessions of a Bad Mother and How (Not) to Murder Your Husband; founder, www.badmothersclub.com

Nirpal Singh Dhaliwal
freelance journalist; former sex-advice columnist, Evening Standard; author, Tourism

Hugo Rifkind
columnist, The Times, Spectator and GQ; author, Overexposure

Joe Wade
director, Don't Panic; co-writer, The Revolution Will Be Televised

Chair:
David Bowden
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer

Produced by
David Bowden associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer
Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: How to feed a growing world
How to feed a growing world

Monday 29 October, 6.45pm until 8.30pm, Cross Street Chapel, Cross Street, Manchester M2 1NL

Ever since October 2011, when it was estimated that the global population had passed seven billion people, discussions have raged about how the world will cope. With food prices already rising amid deeper environmental concerns, the United Nations and governments worldwide are particularly preoccupied with how we will feed ourselves. An increasing population is overwhelmingly viewed as a matter of more mouths to feed rather than a potential source of solutions. So while feeding the world seems a straightforward technical issue of implementing the most efficient and effective farming practices, a host of extraneous social, political, cultural, even ethical issues seem to thwart the implementation of solutions. The angst-ridden discussion about the pros and cons of growing genetically modified crops is only one example. Meanwhile, Western societies seem disillusioned with the gains of industrialised food production. Factory farming and processed foods are demonised; local, organic, natural are celebrated.

One solution is to rethink what we eat completely. With some food futurologists and nutritionists predicting meat will become a luxury even in the West, one proposal to ‘fill the meat gap’ is eating insects. This is no longer a marginal idea, a gross bush-tucker trial from TV’s I’m a Celebrity… jungle. The Dutch government recently invested a million euros into research into getting insects into mainstream diets. British food experts are taking seriously research from Wageningen University that shows insects provide as much nutritional value as ordinary meat. There is of course a ‘yuk factor’ to consider, but those who don’t relish the prospect of crunching through a bug sandwich are assured that crickets and grasshoppers can be ground down to be used in burgers and so on. And after all, a large number of the world’s population already eat insects as a regular part of their diet: caterpillars and locusts are popular in Africa, crickets are eaten in Thailand and we’ve all seen the HSBC advert in which a Cambodian farmer catches flying insects to keep them off his crops, then cooks and sells them. Have Europeans something to learn from the developing world, or are such dietary choices the product of poverty rather than culinary experimentation?

Why do most of us find the eating of insects repulsive, but don’t flinch when offered fish eggs, liver, kidney, snails? Might not science and modern-farming methods help us go beyond bug-burgers or should we all just become less squeamish? What are the most palatable ways of solving the world’s food crisis?

Nibbling samples of innovative food solutions will be available to try before the discussion.

Speakers
Louise Bolotin
freelance journalist; author, Epilepsy: the essential guide; blogger, The Lone Gourmet

Rob Lyons
science and technology director, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Economy Forum

Dr Angelica Michelis
senior lecturer, Department of English, Manchester Metropolitan University; author, Eating Theory: the theory of eating (forthcoming)

Dr Carol Wagstaff
senior lecturer, crop quality for health, University of Reading

Chair:
Craig Fairnington
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; university finance and accommodation officer

Produced by
Simon Belt IT consultant; coordinator, Manchester Salon
Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Peut-on tolérer la tolérance?
Peut-on tolérer la tolérance?

Friday 26 October, 6.30pm until 9.00pm, Centre D'Animation Daviel, 24 rue Daviel, 75013 Paris, France

La question de la tolérance suscite des prises de position contradictoires en Europe. Elle est célébrée comme un idéal essentiel dans certains discours tout en étant accusée en même temps dans d’autres de saper ses propres valeurs.

Interdire le port de la burqa serait contradictoire avec la tradition de tolérance du Royaume–uni mais dans son combat contre l’islamisme radical, le premier ministre David Cameron appelle à en finir avec ce qu’il nomme « la tolérance passive » du multiculturalisme et prône à la place un « libéralisme musclé ». En Hongrie, maintenant c’est « tolérance zéro » pour tous ceux qui sont soupçonnés de menacer une conception étroite de l’identité nationale et de l’unité du pays, pendant que l’Union Européenne réagit en n’acceptant plus les atteintes à la liberté de la presse et les mesures anti-roms du gouvernement hongrois.

A la suite des tragiques évènements d’Oslo l’an dernier, la tolérance de la société norvégienne a été jugée excessive par l’ensemble de la classe politique: aussi bien par ceux qui soutiennent les idées de Brevik sinon ses actes que par ceux qui considéraient que laisser se répandre la rhétorique anti-musulmane enflammée de l’extrême droite ne pouvait qu’alimenter ses actions monstrueuses.

En France, les crimes du tueur de Toulouse ont relancé un débat virulent sur les limites de la tolérance. Dans un contexte de campagne électoral 2012 où les esprits se sont vite échauffées, le gouvernement de Nicolas Sarkozy a été à maintes reprises accusé de courir après l’extrême droite dans les débats sur l’immigration, la viande halal, et l’identité nationale, l’opposition a au contraire plaidé pour plus de tolérance envers les minorités religieuses et ethniques. Cependant, pour certains, cet événement a pour effet de rappeler de façon tragique les risques encourus à tolérer des conduites hostiles aux valeurs de l’Occident. Au moment où des politiciens de divers bords sont d’accord pour demander la criminalisation de « l’intolérable » discours négationniste sur le génocide arménien, les tribunaux adoptent une position autre mais pas forcément au nom du droit à la liberté d’expression. Pourtant, d’autres limites à la liberté d’expression (de l’interdiction de diffuser des thèses négationnistes sur la Shoah à l’interdiction du port de la burqa) ne sont pas considérées comme portant atteinte aux valeurs de tolérance de la République.

Finalement de quoi parlons-nous quand nous parlons de tolérance ? Si nous assimilons la tolérance avec le fait de ne pas porter de jugement sur les conduites et les propos, alors la tolérance risque de se confondre avec l’indulgence et peut-être même avec l’indifférence. L’idée de « tolérance zéro » si souvent avancée comme un moyen de protection de dangers éventuels, ne cache t’elle pas plutôt le refus du débat et de la confrontation ? Faut-il envisager la question de la tolérance à partir de la revendication de ma liberté d’agir ou à partir du besoin de sécurité d’autrui ? Pouvons nous permettre d’être tolérants avec ceux qui ne le sont pas ? La liberté d’expression peut-elle être « excessive » ou « irresponsable » ? Le prix de la liberté, n’est-il pas précisément le fait de devoir tolérer des choses immondes, blessantes, agressives ? Ou bien ces concepts ne seraient-ils pas inutiles et dangereux dans le monde incertain où nous vivons ?

Speakers
Josie Appleton
director, civil liberties group, Manifesto Club; author, Officious: Rise of the Busybody State

Dr Chris Bickerton
associate professor of international relations, Sciences Po, Paris; author, European Integration: from nation states to member states; co-editor, The Current Moment

Carole Diamant
déléguée générale, Fondation Egalité des Chances-Institut de France Education Nationale

Thomas Klau
chef du bureau parisien, Relations Extérieures du Conseils de l'Europe

Chair:
Dr Shirley Lawes
researcher; consultant and university teacher, specialising in teacher education and modern foreign languages; Chevalier dans l’ordre des Palmes Académiques

Produced by
Dr Shirley Lawes researcher; consultant and university teacher, specialising in teacher education and modern foreign languages; Chevalier dans l’ordre des Palmes Académiques
Recommended readings
FreeSpeechDebate

Thirteen languages. Ten principles. One conversation.

University of Oxford, 2012

How the burqa became a symbol of freedom

France’s attempts to defend the idea of the Republic through an illiberal ban on Islamic headscarves has backfired.

Josie Appleton, spiked, 19 May 2011

L'illusion répressive

Interdisons les apéros géants, interdisons les bandes, interdisons le niqab, interdisons de faire de l'art avec le drapeau national, interdisons, interdisons...

Ludovic Duprey, Le Monde, 10 August 2008

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Bookshop Barnie: Martin Jacques
Bookshop Barnie: Martin Jacques

Friday 26 October, 6.30pm until 8.30pm, Foyles Charing Cross, 113-119 Charing Cross Road, London WC2H 0EB

Martin Jacques is visiting professor at Tsinghua University in Beijing. His recent book, When China Rules the World: the end of the Western world and the birth of a new global order, suggests that this is China’s century. Indeed, its economic performance seems to vindicate his analysis. But then again, between 1960 and 1972, the Greek economy grew at 8% p.a. (more than China’s projections for 2011-2015). Come and argue about the hype and the reality.

Entrance free. To reserve a place email

Speakers
Dr Martin Jacques
author, When China Rules the World: the end of the Western World and the birth of a new global order

Chair:
Austin Williams
associate professor in architecture, XJTLU University, Suzhou, China; director, Future Cities Project; convenor, Bookshop Barnies; founding member of New Narratives

Produced by
Austin Williams associate professor in architecture, XJTLU University, Suzhou, China; director, Future Cities Project; convenor, Bookshop Barnies; founding member of New Narratives
Recommended readings
When China Rules the World

China will replace the United States as the world's dominant power. In so doing, it will not become more western but the world will become more Chinese.

Martin Jacques, Penguin, 29 March 2012


Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: 2012 End of Festival Party
2012 End of Festival Party

Sunday 21 October, 7.30pm until 11.30pm, Barbican Bar and Vibe Bar

Battle of Ideas 2012 End of Festival ‘WRAP’ Party

7.30pm - 9.00pm

Barbican Bar, Level G, Lakeside Terrace, Entrance

Carry on the debates informally over drinks.


9.30pm - Late

Vibe Bar, 91-95 Brick Lane, London E1 6QL

Keep your lanyard or wristband for free entry.

 

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with


Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: No future: has pop lost its radical edge?
No future: has pop lost its radical edge?

Sunday 21 October, 6.30pm until 7.30pm, Garden Room

When some commentators described the student anti-fees protest in 2010 as a ‘dubstep rebellion’ they fed into a tradition of the powerful relationship of pop music and politics. From Bob Dylan’s ‘Blowing In the Wind’ and the Rolling Stones’ ‘Street Fightin’ Man’ through to Gil Scot-Heron’s ‘The Revolution Will Not Be Televised’ and Public Enemy’s ‘Fight the Power’, popular music has often had a close relationship to powerful social movements. The likes of M.I.A and even Ed Sheeran feel moved to take stances on social issues, while in the UK, rapper Plan B’s ‘Ill Manors’ was hailed as a vital protest song in the wake of last summer’s riots. In the US, in recent years even leading country stars have thrown their support behind Occupy (rather than the Tea Party), gay marriage and against the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq. Even controversial rap collective Odd Future confounded fans and critics alike when member Frank Ocean spoke openly about his bisexuality.

Yet, one writer argues, the economic and political turbulence has led more to ‘the New Boring’ than radical rebellion. Punk and urban music can happily soundtrack Jubilee concerts and the Olympics opening ceremony as much as footage of riots and upheaval. Newsnight can feature Dizzee Rascal or Odd Future and cause less controversy than historian David Starkey, while stars such as Adele can be hailed as non-conformist for enjoying their food and the odd drink. Yet, internationally, the plight of imprisoned Russian feminist-punks Pussy Riot and the emerging hip-hop scenes across the Arab Spring nations offers a reminder that popular music can have genuine anti-authoritarian credentials.

Has contemporary music lost its edge, or is it just that the political battlegrounds have shifted? When their politics are contemptible, can and should we separate the artists from the art as easily in popular music as we might do in other art-forms? Are ageing rebels guilty of retromania when discussing protest music of old, or is there a genuine sense that popular music is currently lacking a maverick, original spirit?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Lindsay Johns
writer and broadcaster; (non-residential) Fellow at the Hutchins Center for African & African-American Research at Harvard University

Barb Jungr
singer, writer and performer; CDs include, The Man in the Long Black Coat and From Stockport to Memphis

Alan Miller
chairman, Night Time Industries Association (NTIA)

Pedro Quintino de Sousa
researcher on Portuguese and European literature, CLEPUL (Center For European and Lusophone Literatures and Cultures)

Chair:
David Bowden
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer

Produced by
David Bowden associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer
Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Atheism: what's the point?
Atheism: what's the point?

Sunday 21 October, 6.30pm until 7.30pm, Cinema 1

From the controversy over teaching ‘intelligent design’ in schools, to arguments over prayers at council meetings or religiously based opposition to euthanasia, abortion or gay marriage, atheists have crossed swords with religious believers over a number of issues in recent years. And the critique is not limited to mainstream religion: champions of science, reason and evidence have also sought to expose the pretences of clairvoyants and alternative-health charlatans. There is a consensus among many educated people that religious values distort rather than contribute to private morality and public debate, and that evidence should always trump faith. But can anything amounting to a value system in itself be built just on atheism, or is atheism no more than a lack of belief in gods?

Just because some atheists have a commitment to reason, does that mean that atheists are overall more likely to be rational than other people? Are atheists really any more likely to be rational in general than those who do believe in a god? Aren’t there just as many atheists who believe in life after death, homeopathy, healing crystals, horoscopes, and a whole raft of superstitions?

Many prominent atheists would no doubt say that they are atheists because of their prior commitment to reason. But it can seem to many observers that it is the atheism that often comes first, rising out of a rejection of religious belief. For some, ‘atheist fundamentalism’ is an unattractive mirror image of the religiosity it opposes, and informed by contempt for the supposedly ignorant and scientifically illiterate population, or ‘nobbers’, as one celebrity scientist calls them. Is this because ‘atheism’ per se really is no more than the negative rejection of a belief in gods? If it is, how relevant is it in a society where fewer and fewer people are being raised with a belief in gods which they can reject? Is it precisely the lack of an experience of this personal emancipation, or journey towards humanism and reason, that leads atheists instead to direct their hostility at religious believers and institutions? How compelling is a negative belief?

Nonetheless, whether it’s the worship of Stephen Fry as the cleverest human on the planet or hostility to the influence of organised religion in politics, there is a growing identification with a non-religious, atheist, and humanist approach as a cultural movement, especially among bright young people. For many, atheism implies support for such progressive causes as the ‘right to die’ and LGBT equality, human rights and liberal education. But is atheism always the same as ‘humanism’? Is it really the idea of ‘atheism’ doing the work in these causes? Are there really such things as atheist values? Aren’t there as many religious people who also have liberal, progressive and humane ideas - especially in societies like Europe where religions have responded to humanism by emulating it in many ways? And aren’t there many religious people - perhaps a majority - who are just as committed as atheists are, maybe even more so, to the idea of a secular state? If so, what is the point of atheism?


Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Andrew Copson
chief executive, British Humanist Association

Dr Michael Fitzpatrick
writer on medicine and politics; author, The Tyranny of Health

Alom Shaha
writer and science teacher; author The Young Atheist's Handbook

Mark Vernon
journalist; author, God: all that matters and The Big Questions: God

Chair:
Dolan Cummings
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)

Produced by
Dolan Cummings associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)
Recommended readings
Atheism+: the new New Atheists

Atheism+ is, at its most basic, an attempt wrap things together more formally, to create a movement that prioritises issues of equality and does so from an explicitly non-religious perspective.

Nelson Jones, New Statesman, 23 August 2012

Young Atheist's Handbook: Lessons for living a good life without God

In a charming blend of memoir, philosophy, and science, Shaha explores the questions about faith and the afterlife that we all ponder.

Alom Shaha, BiteBack, 19 July 2012

Atheists, please read my heathen manifesto

Atheists are too often portrayed as bishop-bashing extremists and any meaningful debate with the religious becomes impossible. How can this be remedied?

Julian Baggini, Guardian, 25 March 2012

Religious belief is more than an evolutionary affliction

A new book attempts to ground a defence of religious freedom in cognitive science, but in doing so it reveals a lack of faith in freedom itself.

Dolan Cummings, spiked, 1 March 2012

American atheists must define themselves, not be defined by the religious

If secularists are to succeed in making any inroads on the default position of religion, they must reclaim the original definition of religious liberty

Susan Jacoby, Washington Post, 28 December 2011

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: What makes a good journalist anyway?
What makes a good journalist anyway?

Sunday 21 October, 6.30pm until 7.30pm, Pit Theatre

Although the press has been vilified recently, we all understand the ideal of a good journalist. From the heroes of Watergate to the war reporter Marie Colvin, whose death this year made her a powerful symbol of brave investigation, those who fearlessly expose the truth are widely admired. Many young people still aspire to work in the media and journalism degrees are more popular than ever, often pursued by starry-eyed idealists. Of course, heroic reporting is not typical of what ordinary journalists mostly do. never mind illegal hacking; new ethical challenges and changing practices threaten the standards to which today’s journalists so rightly aspire.

When former Independent journalist Johann Hari was accused of plagiarism in 2011, what surprised many was his defence; he thought he’d done nothing wrong. To many, this exemplified a decline in journalistic standards. Rather than undergoing a thorough apprenticeship on local papers, a new generation of journalists is being recruited whose main experience is of blogs and social media. It seems anybody with an interesting enough blog or Twitter account can become an opinion former; the Huffington Post is one of the most influential political blogs around, while Techcrunch has even interviewed President Obama. So should bloggers be taken as seriously as those who have worked their way up through the ranks of national newspapers? If the next generation of intrepid investigators is to emerge from citizen journalism, who will train them (and pay them) to become real journalists? At the same time, the ideals of good journalism seem to have changed. Many journalists now see themselves as partisan campaigners, rather than objective reporters: War correspondents lead calls for humanitarian intervention; social affairs correspondents implicitly endorse or condemn particular policies; and science journalists can seem indistinguishable from environmentalist activists. Meanwhile, investigative journalism has been trumped by WikiLeaks-style revelations, with journalists apparently content to merely sift through leaked information.

Will the decline of the traditional business models of news gathering destroy the traditional values of reporting? If no one digs up the news at ground level, the high towers of scrutiny, comment, campaigning, investigation and the rest will crumble. And what does it take to really check facts and dig deep when the news has become a rolling process, updated live, 24/7? The internet and mobile technologies promise access to more news than ever, but we don’t yet like to pay for content. And while hostility towards one Labour MP’s call for journalist licences led to some hasty backtracking, is there a way of ensuring young reporters have high standards of journalistic integrity instilled in them?

Speakers
Dr Andrew Calcutt
principal lecturer in journalism, University of East London; editor, Proof; co-author, Journalism Studies: a critical introduction

Coral James O'Connor
lecturer in broadcast & multimedia journalism, University of Brighton

Kevin Marsh
journalist; former editor, Today programme; former executive editor, BBC College of Journalism; author, Stumbling Over Truth

Chair:
Sean Bell
secretary and founder member, The Brighton Salon; copy-editor, writer and journalist

Produced by
Sean Bell secretary and founder member, The Brighton Salon; copy-editor, writer and journalist
Recommended readings
The prince and the public interest

The Sun newspaper's publication of nude photographs of Prince Harry has reinvigotated the hue-and-cry about the antics of the British tabloids, but amid the complaints, the issue of what news is actually for is the buried lede.

Jason Walsh, presseurop, 29 August 2012

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Looking back today
Looking back today

Sunday 21 October, 6.30pm until 7.30pm, Fountain Room

The term ‘the Sixties and Seventies’ conjures a wealth of defining images: from iconic portraits of Bob Dylan, Martin Luther King and Che Guevara through to devastating images of the horrors of Vietnam and Cambodia. While TV pictures of war, protest and urban unrest streamed into millions of homes worldwide, innovative photographers like William Eggleston, David Goldblatt, Shōmei Tōmatsu and Ernest Cole were pioneering new documentary forms, expressing more complex, personal perspectives of the world. Whether exposing the dehumanising effects of South African apartheid, subverting Soviet totalitarianism or recording everyday reality in America’s mid-West, human experience and political struggle remained key concerns. Yet beyond reportage, many of the greatest images of that era encapsulate its aspiration for novelty and change alongside a spirited celebration of freedom. As the Barbican exhibition ‘Everything Was Moving’ shows, this new generation of photographers documenting a changing world were ‘driven to understand that world, as well as their place in it’.

In today’s digital age where Instagram and high-quality cheap cameras potentially turn us all into citizen photographers, there appears to be considerable nostalgia for the Sixties and Seventies. On a political level, young rioters and Occupy-style clicktivists drape themselves in the iconography and rhetoric of the soixante-huitards; gay-marriage campaigners claim the mantle of the civil-rights movement, and Korda’s Guevara portrait served as the inspiration for Barack Obama’s 2008 election campaign. On a cultural level, critic Simon Reynolds has coined the term ‘retromania’ to describe the enduring fascination among artists and musicians for mining heritage. An iconic moment in hit Sixties-set drama Mad Men saw advertising guru Don Draper deliver a key pitch for Kodak cameras (a company which filed for bankruptcy protection in 2012). Meanwhile, photography as a call for action struggles in the straitjacket of a political culture grown skeptical of authenticity, individuality and the possibility of the new.

Does our fascination with the Sixties and Seventies golden age reveal a desire to capture some of the period’s radical spirit, or does it reveal more of a conservative retreat into nostalgia? In looking back, are we evading responsibility to confront and remake the world as it is? Where do we find radical photography today? Should we be willing to let go the quarrel between documentary and art photography or is it dangerous to blur the lines? Do we need more photographers willing to change the world, or merely to explain it?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Stephen Bull
artist, exhibited at Tate Britain and The Photographers' Gallery, London; author, Photography; lecturer, University for the Creative Arts, Farnham

Pauline Hadaway
writer and researcher

Sarah E James
lecturer, history of art, University College London; author, Common Ground: photography in Germany during the Cold War (forthcoming); regular contributor, Frieze, Photoworks, Art Review and Art Monthly

Chair:
Dr Tiffany Jenkins
writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there

Produced by
Pauline Hadaway writer and researcher
Recommended readings
Looking back today

‘Everything Was Moving: Photography from the 60s and 70s’ at the Barbican Art Gallery

Pauline Haddaway, Future Cities Project, 27 September 2012

Photography and Protest

This issue of Photoworks magazine engages with the possibilities for photography as both a tool for the documentation of protest and as a vehicle for protest and political activism.

photoworks, 1 June 2012

Digital Photography never looked so Analogue

Amateur photography is living in the past.

Stephen Bull, frame and reference, 4 May 2012

Futures Past: History, Memory and Nostalgia

As the ghosts of an analogue past come to haunt a digital present, forms of nostalgia loom large in some quarters, while the optimistic claims made for new technologies are subject to increasing scrutiny.

photoworks, May 2012

Pop history: a poor substitute for real history

While society has become ever more estranged from the great events of the past, music has been on a lazy nostalgia trip of reunions, reissues, recycling and anniversaries.

Neil Davenport, spiked review of books, 1 December 2011

Belfast: Exposed

So where are the people? Good question. And we won’t find the answer unless we engage with the people. And it seems the people are speaking out.

Chris Gilligan, Culture Wars, 8 July 2011

Where Are the People? Contemporary Photographs of Belfast, 2002 -– 2010

In Where are the people? Contemporary Photographs of Belfast, 2002-2010, six writers have been invited to reflect upon a series of photographic projects and to think through different images from a number of viewpoints.

Various, Belfast Exposed Photography, 1 December 2010


Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Monarchy in the UK
Monarchy in the UK

Sunday 21 October, 6.30pm until 7.30pm, Conservatory

At first glance, the monarchy of 2012 seems to be in rude health. The Diamond Jubilee has been not so much an occasion for jingoistic national fervour as for quiet satisfaction that we live in a stable, free democracy that much of the world’s population can only envy. The Queen is viewed with almost unalloyed respect for the personal qualities she has brought to her role, and the wedding of William and Kate has restored the popularity of the House of Windsor to a pitch not seen since the early days of Diana. To many, the monarchy seems to provide a level of disinterested public service that is in sharp contrast to a political world tarnished with self-seeking and scandal.

And yet, and yet. This is the twenty-first century. If we were designing the constitution for a liberal democracy from scratch, it would not have a place for a hereditary monarchy, would it? Alex Salmond may argue that the Queen could remain head of state in Scotland even if full independence were achieved, but that can be seen as an awkward relic of a long history of conflict and union between neighbouring states. Moreover, on top of traditional political objections, in 2012 there appears to exist a more cultural disdain for all things ‘royal’. The jubilee celebrations were characterised by some as a ‘national sedative’, and ‘republican’ ire often seemed to be aimed less at the monarchy itself than the supposedly docile masses who doff their caps to it.  Whatever, contemporary royal events often feel more like evidence of popularity for celebrity than monarchist zeal. Conversely, republicanism remains a marginal political movement in contemporary UK. Interestingly, the lack of a popular campaign for a democratic republic is has less to do with a commitment to the hereditary principle than cynicism about politics in general. For many, the words ‘President Blair’ alone are enough to see off the case for a republic.

Is there still a logical case to be made for hereditary monarchy, beyond affection, nostalgia and inertia? Some would argue, for example, that its existence provides a code of allegiance which ensures ministers, the armed forces, and the judiciary do not seek to extend their powers beyond those allotted to them. Are there deeper principles that demand radical change? Or will we just stagger on with an institution that seems to have become adept at finding new and compelling raisons d’être, however much society changes?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Rafe Heydel-Mankoo
writer and broadcaster; co-editor, Burke's World Orders of Knighthood & Merit

Tessa Mayes
investigative journalist; director, The Queen & Us

Scott Pepe
deputy chairman, British Monarchist Society

Graham Smith
chief executive, Republic

Chair:
Richard Swan
writer and academic

Produced by
Scott Pepe deputy chairman, British Monarchist Society
Richard Swan writer and academic
Recommended readings
What we want

A democratic Britain with an elected head of state

Republic

Republican versus royalists: a very civil war

Despite the jubilee, anti-monarchists say their support is rising. Conal Urquhart joins their leader as he tries to rouse a revolution in the west country

Conal Urquhart, Guardian, 30 September 2012

Capturing the moment the royals became slebs

Those grainy pics of a naked Kate Middleton tell a striking story about the celebrification of the Windsors.

Tim Black, spiked, 20 September 2012

Queen enjoys record support in Guardian/ICM poll

Pre-diamond jubilee surge in royalism hides bad news for Prince Charles, with almost half wanting succession to jump to William

Tom Clark, Guardian, 24 May 2012

How the royals became cool

Princes William and Harry are seen as being down-to-earth regular guys. The Duchess of Cambridge is supposedly one of us. How did our stuffy and out-of-touch monarchy suddenly get its mojo back?

Stuart Jeffries, Guardian, 11 April 2012

In Our Time: Republicanism

Melvyn Bragg examines how English republicanism has developed from Cromwell to the present day, and examines whether it is embedded as a sentiment deep within the culture of England.

BBC Radio 4, 3 February 2000

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Are the kids all right?
Are the kids all right?

Sunday 21 October, 6.30pm until 7.30pm, Frobisher 4-6

Today’s representation of childhood often seems overly negative: children are seen to be suffering from a litany of ills and problems. At the start of 2012, newspaper headlines proclaimed ‘Unhappy childhoods afflict one in 10 youngsters’, following the publication of a survey by the Children’s Society. Britain’s ‘happiness guru’, Lord Layard, declared: ‘Everybody involved in shaping children’s lives should sit up and take note of this report.’ Elaine Hindal, director of the society’s Campaign for Childhood, said: ‘We know that, right now, half a million children are unhappy’, and ‘unless we act now’ we risk creating ‘a lost future generation’. But are things really so bad for today’s kids? Surely many of the changes we have seen over recent decades are also a cause for celebration? For a start, children are healthier and wealthier than ever before. As the influential 2007 UNICEF report on child wellbeing in rich countries noted: ‘By almost any available measure, the great majority of children born into today’s developed societies enjoy unprecedented levels of health and safety.’

And yet might it be naive to paint an overly rosy picture of contemporary changes, some of which are the unintended consequence of attempts to improve children’s lives, from killjoy health-and-safety mania to questionable self-esteem initiatives? It might be going too far to suggest today’s children are threatened by a new-found ‘nature deficit disorder’, as some claim, but it is true that ‘cotton-wool kids’ are denied many of the freedoms and experiences that past generations took for granted. And if anti-bullying initiatives dominate schools, might we not expect today’s children to be less resilient, more victim-like? If, as is alleged, youth are reared on a diet of immediate gratification and entitlement (with some commentators seeing such trends as at least one factor in last summer’s UK riots), can we assume there will be no fallout? How has childhood changed in recent decades? Which changes are for the better and which for the worse? Could there be unique benefits as well as downsides to being a child today as opposed to in the past? Is it possible to delineate what are the key ingredients of a good childhood?

Speakers
Paul Flatters
social researcher; chief executive, Trajectory; former chief executive, Future Foundation

Kevin Rooney
politics teacher and head of social science, Queen's School, Bushey; co-author, Who's Afraid Of The Easter Rising?

Harriet Sergeant
research fellow, Centre For Policy Studies; author Among the Hoods: my years with a teenage gang

Chair:
Dr Helene Guldberg
director, spiked; author, Reclaiming Childhood: freedom and play in an age of fear and Just Another Ape?

Produced by
Dr Helene Guldberg director, spiked; author, Reclaiming Childhood: freedom and play in an age of fear and Just Another Ape?
Recommended readings
The Good Childhood Report 2012

A review of our children's well-being

The Children's Society, 2012

The National Trust’s imagination deficit

The conservation charity is right to celebrate outdoor play, but the idea of ‘nature-deficit disorder’ is nonsense.

Helene Guldberg, spiked, 19 April 2012

Ignore these pedlars of panic – the kids are all right

Report after report tells us that children are sad, lost and in need of expert intervention. Real-world evidence suggests otherwise.

Helene Guldberg, spiked, 16 January 2012

Viewpoint: Children have never had it so good

Ignore these pedlars of panic – the kids are all right

Paul Flatters, BBC News, 4 January 2012

An overview of child well-being in rich countries

A comprehensive assessment of the lives and well-being of children and adolescents in the economically advanced nations.

UNICEF, 2007

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Banning the Brave New World? The ethics of science
Banning the Brave New World? The ethics of science

Sunday 21 October, 6.30pm until 7.30pm, Frobisher Auditorium 2

For many years, the only hybrid human/animal embryos that could be legally created in the UK were those resulting from fertilising a hamster’s egg with a man’s sperm, as a means of testing male fertility. In 2008, it became legal to create all manner of hybrid human/animal embryos for research purposes, provided that such embryos were destroyed within two weeks of their creation. 2012 saw the establishment of a new £5.8million Centre for Mitochondrial Research at Newcastle University, to develop techniques for preventing the transmission of debilitating mitochondrial disease. But these techniques cannot be tested in clinical trials without a change in the law, and the government has commissioned a ‘public dialogue’ on the issue. Some object that mitochondrial-exchange techniques involve the creation of children with ‘three parents’, while others claim that this objection misunderstands the relevant science.

Those involved in such debates are familiar with the ‘yuck factor’ - the instinctive revulsion said to be felt by many, whenever the natural order of things is interfered with. The yuck factor is an obstacle often negotiated by appeal to scientific evidence, with tensions defused by incorporating ethics committees and ethical considerations into the practice and regulation of biomedicine. But while such procedures address the feelings prompted by scientific advances, they also result in substantive moral objections being either condescendingly dismissed as the irrational ‘yuck’ reaction, or subordinated to the scientistic framework of ‘evidence’. There seems to be scant room for more moral or political arguments, either in favour of, or in opposition to, biomedical progress.

This raises the question of how developments in biomedicine are understood and debated by the public, and whether the public has any meaningful input. By definition, there is no direct public input into scientific research (which is specialised work evaluated by means of peer review), but biomedical policy is supposedly developed under the auspices of the broader democratic process. Such policy affects not only the application of research once it has been conducted, but – if research techniques are contentious, for example if they involve the use of human embryos – whether the research is permitted to proceed at all, much less receive public funds. How are these decisions arrived at? What role do democracy, morality and a grasp of the actual science play in the process?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Professor David Jones
director, Anscombe Bioethics Centre; co-editor, Chimera's Children: Ethical, Philosophical and Religious Perspectives on Human-Nonhuman Experimentation

Professor Robin Lovell-Badge
group leader, stem cell biology and developmental genetics, Francis Crick Institute

Ken MacLeod
award-winning science fiction writer; author, Descent, The Restoration Game and Intrusion; writer-in-residence, MA Creative Writing, Edinburgh Napier University 2013-2014

Güneş Taylor
stem cell researcher, University of Oxford

Chair:
Sandy Starr
communications officer, Progress Educational Trust; webmaster, BioNews

Produced by
Sandy Starr communications officer, Progress Educational Trust; webmaster, BioNews
Recommended readings
The status of the human embryo in UK law and public policy: Gradualist language but instrumental use

The aim of this paper is not primarily to argue, as several commentators have in the past, that the purported “special status” of the embryo in English law is an empty concept giving no real protection. It is rather an attempt to understand why the special status of the embryo appears to be an empty concept, and how it is in fact functioning.

David Jones, Anscombe Bioethics Centre

Misleading talk of 'three-parent babies' helps no one

We should seize the chance to authorise a gene therapy that has the potential to alleviate great suffering

John Harris, Guardian, 19 September 2012

Genetically engineering 'ethical' babies is a moral obligation, says Oxford professor

Genetically screening our offspring to make them better people is just 'responsible parenting', claims an eminent Oxford academic.

Richard Alleyne, Daily Telegraph, 16 August 2012

An eggsample of why it is hard to prove a negative

The only certainty is that more experiments are required to build up evidence either for or against the existence of OSCs. Nonetheless, considering the unnecessary hype surrounding Tilly's work, which rather prematurely suggested cures for infertility, and the likely false expectations this engendered, I hope this latest work will at least provide some balance.

Robin Lovell-Badge, BioNews, 30 July 2012

Bringing new life to dead matter

Human beings have the potential to transform the universe, so let’s not lose sleep about turning it into ‘grey goo’.

Colin McInnes, spiked, 22 May 2012

Human Genetics Commission Final Report Human Genetics Commission, April 2012

Interview: Ken MacLeod, author of Intrusion

Ken MacLeod tells Stuart Kelly why his latest novel aims to be ‘a genomic Aga Saga’ – not just something for science fiction fan

Stuart Kelly, Scotsman, 3 March 2012

Response toNuffield Council on Bioethics as part of its project Emerging Techniques to Prevent Inherited Mitochondrial Disorders

There is no reason to think that techniques involving mitochondrial exchange raise any particular ethical problems in respect of translational treatments.

Progress Educational Trust, 13 February 2012

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Taming tabloid tittle-tattle
Taming tabloid tittle-tattle

Sunday 21 October, 5.00pm until 6.15pm, Pit Theatre

From Page 3 girls to unsavoury sleb photos and lewd speculation into people’s private lives, hatred of the tabloids is about more than phone-hacking, as contributors to the Leveson Inquiry have proven beyond doubt. The visceral contempt for ‘tabloid culture’ is de rigueur for self-styled responsible citizens. It has been accused of generating a dumbed-down climate of public ignorance, dangerously objectifying women and warping the aspirations of celebrity-obsessed youth. But is ‘tabloid culture’ really code for the papers’ uncultured readers? When high-minded ‘ethical’ journalists demonise redtops, are they really deriding the millions who read and enjoy them? Are critics calling for the tabloids to be tamed really talking about the papers, or the public?

It is not hard to see why critics do despair at much tabloid journalism. From Heat magazine to Perez Hilton, E Television to the 3am girls, it seems that Angelina’s weight or Cheryl’s new hairstyle shift more papers than the Euro crisis or deaths in Syria. How do we account for the appetite for salacious, personal stories when such serious challenges face the world? Is it that people are really more interested in celebrity than politics or has the media prioritised the life of celebrities over reporting the news? And do tabloids themselves pander to the most backward instincts of readers, exploiting their fears, fuelling insecurities? What of tabloids that wilfully create panics about everything from Frankenstein foods to scrounging immigrants?

On the other hand, is indulging in gossip and gawping at celebrities really such a vice, or can it just be harmless fun? Should we be aspiring to a society in which people choose broadsheets over the Sun and the Star? Should we cheer if more tabloids go the way of the News of the World, or should we celebrate a diversity of newspaper styles and voices, and embrace tabloids as a valuable contribution, multiplying the views we have access to in a free society?

Speakers
Mark Borkowski
agency head, Borkowski.do; author, The History of the Publicity Stunt and The Fame Formula

Roy Greenslade
professor of journalism, City University, London; blogger, Guardian; media columnist, Evening Standard

Patrick Hayes
director, British Educational Suppliers Association (BESA)

Jo Phillips
award-winning journalist; former press secretary to Paddy Ashdown; co-author, Why Vote?

Chair:
Nathalie Rothschild
freelance journalist; producer and reporter for Sweden's public service radio

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
Leveson revealed the tabloid tribe and their weird customs

They are strange creatures, the tabloid hackery. Too often they fit the film stereotype of the man in the trilby hat complete with a

John Mair, Guardian, 24 September 2012

The truth about anti-tabloid hysteria

Many of the anti-Murdoch stories of the past year have been based more on rumour than reality.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 13 December 2011

We must be free and able to defend private lives against tabloid tyranny

The Leveson inquiry has shown the ravages of an unchecked media. Alas, privacy cannot be trusted solely to self-regulation

Timothy Garton-Ash, Guardian, 23 November 2011

News of the World's last breath: put the handkerchiefs aside

Sunday tabloid's final edition tries to disguise any villainy in sentimental farewell

Roy Greenslade, Guardian, 10 July 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Research for the sake of it?
Research for the sake of it?

Sunday 21 October, 5.00pm until 6.15pm, Frobisher 4-6

Higher education has been a bitterly contested subject in the past couple of years, from rows about the increase in student tuition fees and the Browne Report to open discussion about what the university is for. Academics have reacted angrily to government plans to quantify research in terms of its economic and social impact, which they say diminishes the value of academic research and the open-ended pursuit of knowledge.

Yet there is another little-discussed aspect to contemporary academic research, which may pose an even greater threat its value; that is, the relentless pressure on academics to produce what are known as research outcomes. All university departments now regularly institute research strategies, requiring academics to produce a minimum number of publications and apply for grants in a specified period of time. Departments are keen to create ‘research clusters’ in which academics, whose work may have little in common, are expected to collaborate on research outcomes, such as publications and grant applications. Individual lecturers are regularly monitored to ensure they are producing research. There is a vast research industry dedicated to publishing the ever-expanding number of papers and books, most of which serve little purpose other than to fulfil the research quotas that are demanded.

Is this a triumph for the importance of research as an end in itself? Or when research becomes an end unanchored to intellectual content, interest or any genuine contribution to knowledge, does it lose its value?

Speakers
Clive Bloom
emeritus professor, English and American studies, Middlesex University; author, Riot City: protest and rebellion in the capital

Dr Richard Howells
reader in Culture, Media and Creative Industries, King's College London

Professor James Ladyman
Head of Department of Philosophy, University of Bristol

Dr Vanessa Pupavac
associate professor; co-director of the Centre for the Study of Social and Global Justice, University of Nottingham

Chair:
Dr Tara McCormack
lecturer in international politics, University of Leicester; author, Critique, Security and Power: the political limits to emancipatory approaches

Produced by
Dr Tara McCormack lecturer in international politics, University of Leicester; author, Critique, Security and Power: the political limits to emancipatory approaches
Recommended readings
Bracing for impact may cost sector millions

Universities 'falling over themselves' to hire staff to handle REF case studies.

Paul Jump, Times Higher Education, 11 October 2012

Money for antique rope

Most humanities 'research' is the self-indulgent pursuit of obscure hobbies that neither need nor merit funding, and produces only unsold, unread and unreadable books, argues Clive Bloom

Clive Bloom, Times Higher Education, 13 May 2010

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Drink, smoke, eat: prohibition today
Drink, smoke, eat: prohibition today

Sunday 21 October, 5.00pm until 6.15pm, Garden Room

Are we entering a new prohibitionist era? Drinking and even smoking are still perfectly legal, but there is a palpable sense that they are less acceptable than they once were. Cigarettes have become far more expensive thanks to punitive taxes, and the authorities would like to do something similar with alcohol. The spread of ‘no drinking’ zones in public places also seems to follow the pattern of smoking bans, which now cover every indoor public space and many outdoor ones too. So are we witnessing prohibition by stealth? Instead of banning certain activities, is the state trying render them socially unacceptable?

Putting smokers beyond the social pale certainly seemed to be health secretary Andrew Lansley’s objective when he explained the decision to implement a ‘plain packaging’ policy for cigarettes: ‘[It] is about moving to a place where tobacco and smoking isn’t part of normal life.’ An Australian court’s decision to uphold an even more extreme plain packaging policy has paved the way for similar moves worldwide. And where official anti-smoking policies have gone, anti-booze strategies look set to follow. Dr Vivienne Nathanson of the British Medical Association was angered recently by the proximity of booze to other food stuffs. ‘We have to start denormalising alcohol,’ she said. So might we see ‘plain packaging’ for alcohol too? And will that other bane of public health, so-called junk food, be next for the denormalisation treatment? With a black market already blossoming for tax-free tobacco, can we expect the rise of home-brew and moonshine, or even organised crime dealing in booze as it does with other illicit drugs?

More fundamentally, is it right that the government, aided and abetted by health professionals, seeks to change and mould our behaviour? Or should we be free to determine our own social norms, what is normal and what is not, rather than have these decided for us? In the past, those calling for abstinence, such as the nineteenth-century Temperance movement, did so in moral terms: alcohol damaged and inhibited that which was considered virtuous, be it hard work or good judgement. Is there a moral argument being made today against boozing or smoking? And if not, what does that tell us about the contemporary drive towards the ‘denormalisation’ of certain forms of behaviour? Or is it simply a good thing that the government is looking out for us, encouraging us to adopt lifestyles which won’t cost the NHS millions or make town centres no-go areas on a Saturday night? Are we witnessing a sensible attempt to change our behaviour for the better, or an assault by stealth on our everyday freedoms?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Dr Sarah Jarvis
GP; fellow, Royal College of General Practitioners; BBC1 One Show doctor; author, Women's Health for Life

Rob Lyons
science and technology director, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Economy Forum

Dr Michael Nelson
director of research and nutrition, Children's Food Trust

Christopher Snowdon
director, lifestyle economics, Institute of Economic Affairs; author, The Art of Suppression

Christine Thompson
manager, UK government relations, SABMiller

Chair:
Jason Smith
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas

Produced by
Jason Smith associate fellow, Academy of Ideas
Recommended readings
There's a new species of prohibitionism on the rise

Instead of an outright ban on activities deemed

Jason Smith, Independent, 15 October 2012

Minimum alcohol price 'would save 11,500 pensioners'

The deaths of 11,500 pensioners could be avoided over the next decade if minimum alcohol pricing is rolled out in England, according to new research.

BBC News, 7 September 2012

Alcohol, crime, and the government fiddling the figures

The government is, once again, taking us for fools. Using the usual misinformation, it's trying to tell us what to drink and how to live our lives

David Atherton, The Commentator, 30 July 2012

The smoking ban shows the best way to deal with addiction

It's key to understand that some addicts have a deep emotional connection to smoking

Laurie Penny, Independent, 1 July 2012

Tougher alcohol marketing rules 'may be needed'

Tougher rules on alcohol marketing may be needed, including possibly a ban on sports sponsorship, MPs say.

Nick Triggle, BBC News, 19 June 2012

Smoking hot memo from David Hockney to Health Minister: Keep your mean, dreary views out of my life Read more: http://www.daily

Denying cigarette companies the right to decorate their cigarette packets is a draconian measure of which Stalin’s censorship police would have been proud. It suggests that the Government thinks it can control our thoughts and our desires.

David Hockney, Daily Mail, 15 April 2012

The Art of Suppression: Pleasure, Panic and Prohibition Since 1800

The prohibition of alcohol in the USA was a notorious fiasco. The War on Drugs has been a deadly failure. Bans on alternative nicotine products keep people smoking cigarettes. Attempts to suppress legal highs result in more drugs hitting the market. Prohibition doesn't work but the world is filled with prohibitionists. Why?

Chris Snowdon, Little Dice, 3 October 2011


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Occupy: illusory radicalism?
Occupy: illusory radicalism?

Sunday 21 October, 5.00pm until 6.15pm, Conservatory

From its beginnings in New York’s Zucotti Park last Autumn, there is little doubt that the Occupy movement has been highly successful at grabbing a lot of media attention. Indeed such has been the focus that not only did Time magazine see fit to name the ‘protester’ as its Person of the Year 2011, the American Dialect Society chose ‘occupy’ as its word of the year. And while there has been some criticism of the various occupations in the US and the UK, the coverage has been largely favourable. One commentator praised Occupy for ‘yielding a massive period of political creativity’; another argued that, thanks to Occupy, ‘protest is cool’, and political activism ‘revivified’; and the Church of England’s Giles Fraser, former Canon at St Paul’s, went so far as to declare that if Jesus had been alive today, he’d have been camped outside St Paul’s with the protesters.

But what exactly is being celebrated in the Occupy phenomenon? Some supportive commentators praise the leaderless, non-hierarchical decision-making process employed at the Occupy camps; others hail the protesters’ use of social media; and still more admire the sheer perseverance of those prepared to camp outside throughout the winter months. Yet has there been too much celebration of the Occupiers’ means at the expense of scrutinising their ends? Indeed, in the case of Occupy, has the act of protesting become more important than the point of protesting? Does Occupy represent the transformation of protest into a lifestyle?

Not that the politics of Occupy is completely obscure. At its various locations, it has issued demands for tighter regulation of banks, a reduction in the level of inequality between rich and poor, greater transparency when it comes to political lobbying, and, more broadly, an attack on greed and overconsumption. Yet given these positions and sentiments, what does Occupy say about the meaning of radicalism, indeed, anti-capitalism today? After all, almost all mainstream politicians in Europe and the US talk darkly of corporate avarice and bankers’ greed. And while reducing inequality formed the centrepiece of US President Barack Obama’s state of the union address, British Prime Minister David Cameron has been busy attacking capitalism for its lack of morality. If Occupy is radical, what does that say about the nature of radicalism today? Is the anti-capitalism of Occupy not quite as radical as some would crack it up to be?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Ian Chamberlain
writer and human rights campaigner; former activist, Occupy London Stock Exchange; blogger, Solidarity Bank

Professor Natalie Fenton
joint head of department, co-director, Leverhulme Media Research Centre, Goldsmiths, University of London; editor, New Media, Old News: journalism and democracy in a digital age

Brendan O'Neill
editor, spiked; columnist, Big Issue; contributor, Spectator; author, A Duty to Offend: Selected Essays

George Pitcher
journalist; Anglican priest, St Bride's Church, Fleet Street; author A Time to Live: the case against euthanasia and assisted suicide

Dr Nikos Sotirakopoulos
lecturer in sociology, University of Loughborough; author, The Rise of Lifestyle Activism: From New Left to Occupy

Chair:
Joel Cohen
communications manager, BeyondMe

Produced by
Joel Cohen communications manager, BeyondMe
Dr Nikos Sotirakopoulos lecturer in sociology, University of Loughborough; author, The Rise of Lifestyle Activism: From New Left to Occupy
Recommended readings
Occupy Wall Street: what is to be done next?

How a protest movement without a programme can confront a capitalist system that defies reform

Slavoj Žižek, Guardian, 24 April 2012

Occupy: rediscovering the general will in hard times

Times of economic crisis call into question our systems of democracy. Today's global occupy movement is a call to reclaim the economy as a site of decision. To do so, we will need to rethink ourselves as political subjects.

Natalie Fenton & Nick Couldry, openDemocracy, 9 January 2012

Democracy and Process: The Real Power of Occupy LSX

Writing from Occupy LSX, Ian Chamberlain argues the real power of the movement is the new world of possibilities it has created, built on consensus, cooperation and a rejection of the corporate-guided, party-political approach that has dominated the country for generations.

Ian Chamberlain, Ceasefire, 18 November 2011

Occupy movement: all process and no principle

If the occupiers are so opposed to ‘the one per cent’, why do they keep ripping off its soul-destroying managerial style of politics?

Frank Furedi, spiked, 15 November 2011

It’s 100% certain that they don’t represent 99%

The occupiers’ claim to speak for ‘the 99%’ exposes how determined they are to avoid hard political debate in favour of cheap moralising

Frank Furedi, spiked, 27 October 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Preservation or modernisation?
Preservation or modernisation?

Sunday 21 October, 5.00pm until 6.15pm, Fountain Room

For most of the twentieth century, the preservation of buildings or townscapes reflected a judgement that they were, in some way, of architectural, historic or cultural value. In recent years, however, there has been a parallel trend to preserve buildings and urban areas for different reasons. Reflecting a fear that globalisation and a quickening pace of change are creating ‘social amnesia’ and undermining our sense of place, many European cities are turning to ‘urban memory’. Using objets trouvés, past events, or fragments of the urban fabric, designers and urbanists seek to refashion cultural identity and boost emotional attachment to the post-industrial city. By contrast with static heritage industries, advocates of urban memory see their brand of nostalgia as a creative process; less living in the past than using memory to fortify the future.

English Heritage’s Simon Thurley has argued that an interest in heritage is ‘inbuilt in the psyche of the human race’. But architect Rem Koolhaas claims preservation is actually the invention of modernity; it was only the transformations wrought by modernisation that raised the issue of what to keep. Yet where once modern architects and urbanists celebrated the idea of erasing the past to create the future, today such confidence has long gone. Sometimes the past is romanticised: for example, critics of Clone Towns yearn for the independent shops and boutiques of old, rather than faceless supermarkets, fast-food chains and global fashion outlets. But as the heritage and memory industries have expanded, preservation has shifted from being retroactive to being proactive. So we see the growth of legacy-focused events such as the London Olympics; future memory is almost more important than present reality.

What lies behind the current interest in preservation and memory, and who should decide what is worth keeping? Given many buildings and historic cities are great human achievements, and that regenerated historic areas of cities are often highly popular, is today’s more circumspect approach to modernisation appropriate? Is conservation on the basis of social inclusion an appropriate way to judge the worth of a place or a building, or should such judgements be more practical or aesthetic? Either way, does the obsession with memory threaten to freeze us in an unchanging present?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “save link as”)

Speakers
Alastair Donald
associate director, Future Cities Project; architecture programme manager, British Council

Dr Tim Edensor
reader in cultural geography, Manchester Metropolitan University

Jeremy Musson
writer and historic buildings consultant; former architectural editor, Country Life

Luis T Pereira
founding partner, [A] ainda arquitectura architecture studio, Porto

Chair:
Dr Tiffany Jenkins
writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there

Produced by
Alastair Donald associate director, Future Cities Project; architecture programme manager, British Council
Recommended readings
Liverpool Waters – review

If it goes ahead, the multibillion-pound Liverpool Waters scheme will destroy the city's historic character

Rowan Moore, Observer, 7 May 2012

Overlooked heritage

A world heritage site award from Unesco is seen as a boon for tourism and those looking to raise the status of a city, but there can be unforeseen consequences when it comes to development

Simon Thurley, Financial Times, 30 March 2012

Istanbul sees history razed in the name of regeneration

Turkey's cultural capital is undergoing a huge construction programme that is driving out communities

Constanze Letsch, Guardian, 2 March 2012

Can Rem Koolhaas Save Architecture From Preservation?

Over time, Koolhaas argues, the kinds of things that have been considered preservable have broadened — originally just monuments, now expansive and maddeningly indistinct

Ben Davis, Artinfo, 24 May 2011

False Urban Memory Syndrome

Removed from any political context, the result of urban memory practices is often simply the celebration of attachment to place for its own sake.

Austin Williams, Future Cities Project, 14 May 2004

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Trust me: I'm a scientist
Trust me: I'm a scientist

Sunday 21 October, 5.00pm until 6.15pm, Frobisher Auditorium 2

Policymakers regularly accompany their policy proposals with scientific claims, while campaigners also cite ‘the science’ to further their causes. But this tendency has not been without problems for the reputation of science and scientists. In 2010, for instance, it was revealed that the IPCC’s widely reported claim – that global warming would cause the Himalayan glaciers to melt by 2035 – was simply not true. In Autumn last year, the British Medical Association, as part of its anti-smoking crusade, asserted that smoking in cars generates 23 times more toxins than you would find in a smoky bar. While the figure was impressively frightening, it was also untrue.

There are countless other instances, from claims about whether a glass of red wine a day is good for our hearts to assertions that fetuses feel pain, where the science used to justify a particular course of action or argument has proven to be unreliable. Do such cases undermine the authority of science? Are we inclined to trust science less given the number of high-profile fictions passed off as scientific fact? Some suggest the peer-review process needs to be tightened; others that too much pressure is exerted on research institutions to gain media exposure which leads to exaggerated or distorted claims. But is this missing the point? Is the more significant problem the attempt to use science and scientific claims to justify political and moral arguments?

We experience this most prominently, although far from exclusively, in environmentalist discourse. There, arguments for reduced energy consumption, for changes in the way we live, are made in terms of that which the science demands. In effect, science is being used to tell us what to do. So rather than the problem being too little trust in science, are too many inclined to trust the science too much? Do government, activists and campaigners need to stop hiding behind science and scientific claims and make their arguments in moral and political rather than scientific terms?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose save-link as)

Speakers
Dr Stuart Derbyshire
reader in psychology, University of Birmingham; associate editor, Psychosomatic Medicine and Pain

Dr Roger Giner-Sorolla
reader in social psychology, University of Kent

Imran Khan
director, Campaign for Science and Engineering (CaSE)

Professor Sir Mark Walport
director, Wellcome Trust; Government Chief Scientific Adviser (from April 2013)

Chair:
Dr Nina Powell
doctoral research fellow, National University of Singapore

Produced by
Dr Stuart Derbyshire reader in psychology, University of Birmingham; associate editor, Psychosomatic Medicine and Pain
Dr Nina Powell doctoral research fellow, National University of Singapore
Recommended readings
The spectre of plagiarism haunting Europe

A spectre is haunting Europe, and this time it is the spectre of plagiarism and scientific misconduct. Some high-profile politicians have had to resign in the last 18 months - but the revelations are also shaking respected European universities.

Debora Weber-Wulff, BBC News, 25 July 2012

The Minimal Publishable Unit

What constitutes a minimal publishable unit in scientific publishing ? The transition to online publishing and the proliferation of journals is creating a setting where anything can be published.

Pedro Beltrao, Public Rambling blog, 9 May 2012

War Of The Worlds: When Science, Politics Collide

Roger Cone is a microbiologist, not a politician. He struggles with a basic truth: For all the scientific acceptance of evolution, many Americans simply don't believe it is factually accurate.

Scott Neuman, NPR, 17 April 2012

Smoking in cars: the BMA’s dodgy dossier

The campaign against lighting up in vehicles is as underpinned by misinformation as Blair's bluster on Iraq was. Why isn't there more scepticism?

Rob Lyons, spiked, 17 November 2011

Just the facts, please

Peer review is being co-opted into the political process, says Sandy Starr, at the cost of impartiality and independence

Sandy Starr, Times Higher Education, 27 October 2010

Manifold Destiny

A legendary problem and the battle over who solved it.

Sylvia Nasar and David Gruber, New Yorker, 28 August 2006

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Building an intellectual legacy – the Battle for <em>which</em> ideas?
Building an intellectual legacy – the Battle for which ideas?

Sunday 21 October, 5.00pm until 6.15pm, Cinema 1 Keynote Controversies

‘Ideas are the cogs that drive history, and understanding them is half way to being aboard that powerful juggernaut rather than under its wheels’. AC Grayling

Society seems woefully lacking in Big Ideas, and we seem to crave new thinking. In Britain, great hopes rest on the legacy of the Olympics, but however inspiring the sporting excellence we all witnessed, is it realistic that a summer of feel-good spectacle can resolve deep-rooted cultural problems, from widespread disdain for competitition to community fragmentation? In America, Mitt Romney has pledged to pit substantial ideas against the empty ‘yes, we can’ sloganeering of Barack Obama, with his running mate Paul Ryan dubbed the ‘intellectual’ saviour of the Republican Party, but can they really deliver? Europe, once the home of Enlightenment salons, is now associated more with EU technocrats than philosophes. Looking to the intellectual legacy of the past is considered out of pace with an ever-changing world. We seem estranged from ideas associated with important moments in history - the Renaissance, the Enlightenment, the American and French Revolutions. Can even a basic idea like free will survive the challenges of neuroscience and genetics? When the internet offers information at the click of a mouse, what’s the point of pedagogy?

Some contend intellectual life has rarely been healthier; after all today’s governments appoint economists, philosophers and scientific advisers to positions of influence, and the fashion for evidence-based policy puts a premium on academic research. Nevertheless, the emphasis is on ‘what works’ utility and short-term impact rather than open-ended, risky ideas. Often data is passed off as Truth, and Socratic dialogue replaced by rows over conflicting evidence. The scramble for the next Big Idea seems to have replaced the creative and painstaking development of ideas. It’s as though serious ideas can be conjured up in brainstorming sessions or critical-thinking classes. But think-tanks kite-flying the latest outside-of-the-box, blue-skies-thinking speak more to pragmatism and opportunism than following in the tradition of Plato. Ideas become free-floating, divorced from their origins, and take on any meaning one cares to ascribe to them. Hence freedom can mean protection, its defence leading to illiberal regulations; equality can mean conformity and sameness; tolerance becomes a coda for indifference, and individualism denotes little more than selfishness.

Where apparently novel concepts catch on, from sustainability to fairness, identity to offence, they are often little more than fashionable sound-bites. Other ideas are even described as dangerous; those who espouse the ‘wrong’ ideas branded as modern-day heretics. But can we ever hope to approach the truth if we stifle dissent? Is intellectual life on the wane? Is it conservative to cling to old ideas, or if we don’t stand on the shoulders of giants, are we doomed to stand still ? Might truth seeking be more important than the Truth?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Andrew Keen
entrepreneur; founder, Audiocafe.com; author, Digital Vertigo: how today's online social revolution is dividing, diminishing, and disorienting us

Ivan Krastev
chairman of the Centre for Liberal Strategies in Sofia; permanent fellow at the Institute for Human Sciences in Vienna

Dr Ellie Lee
reader in social policy, University of Kent, Canterbury; director, Centre for Parenting Culture Studies

Rob Riemen
writer and cultural philosopher; founder & president, Netherlands-based Nexus Institute; author, Nobility of Sprit: a forgotten ideal and The Eternal Return of Fascism

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
The Disappearance of Public Intellectuals

Since the 1970s, we have witnessed the forces of market fundamentalism strip education of its public values, critical content, and civic responsibilities as part of its broader goal of creating new subjects wedded to consumerism, risk-free relationships, and the destruction of the social state.

Henry A Giroux, Counterpunch, 8 October 2012

The higher education revolution - is there any evidence for it?

As VCs gather for their annual conference, Louis Coiffait considers the main drivers of change and examines whether or not they will lead to revolutionary transformation in UK HE

Louis Coiffait, Guardian, 12 September 2012

Declaring war against bluster and rhetoric

In 2012, Frank Furedi will be writing a monthly column on the hollow words and thoughts of twenty-first-century political life. This month, he reclaims the word ‘conversation’.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 29 January 2012

Against evidence-based policy-making

The big lie about evidence-based policy-making is that it’s based on evidence. Evidence no more produces and speaks for itself than cars decide their destinations.

Ben Pile, Independent, 28 November 2011

The Public Intellectual Project

The project is designed to provide a platform for the general public to think carefully about a range of social problems that affect their lives. It will also allow a generation of scholars to reflect on their own intellectual practices, discourses and understanding of what it might mean to embrace their role as public intellectuals.

Henry A Giroux, Truthout, 26 October 2011

Why don't we love our intellectuals?

While France celebrates its intelligentsia, you have to go back to Orwell and Huxley to find British intellectuals at the heart of national public debate. Why did we stop caring about ideas? When did 'braininess' become a laughing matter?

John Naughton, Observer, 11 May 2011

Intellectuals and Society

There has probably never been an era in history when intellectuals have played a larger role in society. When intellectuals who generate ideas are surrounded by a wide range of others who disseminate those ideas — whether as journalists, teachers, staffers to legislators or clerks to judges — the influence of intellectuals on the way a society evolves can be huge.

Thomas Sowell, National Review, 5 January 2010

This ‘revolt of the experts’ is revolting

It was wrong of the government to sack David Nutt. But it’s also wrong for experts to pose as paragons of wisdom who are above democracy.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 2 November 2009

Blue sky thinking

Blue sky thinking − even schools cannot escape this management cliché! But there is a nugget of value to be found within this particular style of brainstorming, especially when it comes to professional and personal learning. With this in mind, we explore how to make it work in schools

teachingexpertise, 1 June 2008

The Responsibility of Intellectuals Noam Chomsky, New York Review of Books, 23 February 1963

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Abortion: a medical or a moral choice?
Abortion: a medical or a moral choice?

Sunday 21 October, 3.15pm until 4.45pm, Frobisher Auditorium 2

Abortion is a procedure whose relationship to medicine is neither straightforward nor agreed upon. It does have to be carried out by a licensed clinician with specific medical knowledge, but neither pregnancy nor the absence of pregnancy is a disease. They only require medical intervention (abortion for an unwanted pregnancy, or fertility treatment to bring about a pregnancy when nature does not oblige) in specific and subjective circumstances. The simultaneous medical and non-medical character of abortion has consequences for the meaning of the word ‘choice’.

While ‘pro-choice’ is the preferred term for those who support a woman’s right to have an abortion, the word also has quite different connotations. In health circles, it has become associated with the supposed empowerment of the patient, through the introduction of market competition and greater transparency, both very controversial developments. Furthermore, ‘informed choice’ has become a euphemism for individual choices that take account of official public-health information or that follow a period of counselling. Because of its non-medical aspects, however, abortion involves choice in the more fundamental sense of a moral choice, both on the part of the patient and on the part of the relevant clinicians. ‘Choice’ may be a popular buzzword in health-policy circles, but moral choice does not enjoy similar levels of official recognition or endorsement.

The 1967 Abortion Act says an abortion can only proceed if two doctors state, in good faith, that failure to abort would adversely affect a woman’s physical or mental health. Does this create space for genuine moral choice? Or is it a disingenuous compromise, bundling a multitude of reasons for choosing abortion into the category of ‘mental health’, and thus precluding the good faith the law demands? Is the meaning of a moral choice diminished if that choice can be exercised routinely, as critics of the ‘routinisation’ of abortion argue? What consequences will the introduction of new fetal-testing technologies that require only a sample of the mother’s blood, such as cell-free fetal DNA testing and whole fetal genome sequencing, have for the choice to have an abortion? And is this choice ultimately medical, or moral?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Dr Sarah Chan
deputy director, Institute for Science, Ethics and Innovation, University of Manchester; research fellow, bioethics and law

Steven Edwards
professor of philosophy of healthcare, Swansea University

Ann Furedi
chief executive, British Pregnancy Advisory Service; author, The Moral Case for Abortion

Peter D Williams
executive officer, Right To Life

Chair:
Jennie Bristow
senior lecturer in sociology, Canterbury Christ Church University; author, The Sociology of Generations: New directions and challenges and Baby Boomers and Generational Conflict; co-author, Parenting Culture Studies

Produced by
Sandy Starr communications officer, Progress Educational Trust; webmaster, BioNews
Recommended readings
Being Pro-Life Doesn't Make Me Any Less Of A Lefty

Listening to fellow pundits on the left react with rage and disbelief to the support by the Health Secretary, Jeremy Hunt, for halving the abortion time limit to 12 weeks, I was reminded of the late Christopher Hitchens.

Mehdi Hasan, Huffington Post, 14 October 2012

UK: Storm over Health Secretary’s support for 12-week abortion time limit

The government has ‘no plans’ to bring in new laws governing when women can legally have an abortion, Prime Minister David Cameron has said, following Jeremy Hunt’s comments in the run-up to the Conservative party conference.

Abortion Review, 8 October 2012

Why the Women’s Minister Shouldn’t Deny Women Later Abortion

Early access to abortion services is extremely important. Thanks to tests which can detect pregnancies before a woman has even missed a period, women who know they do not want to continue with their pregnancy can now often refer themselves directly into services, with their care paid for by the NHS.

Clare Murphy, Huffington Post, 4 October 2012

Abortion limit: Tory minister for women backs reduction to 20 weeks

Pro-choice campaigners express alarm after Maria Miller insists law must 'reflect the way medical science has moved on'

Ben Quinn, Guardian, 3 October 2012

Why ‘choice’ matters

When we talk about pregnancy termination, the language of ‘choice’ is not helpful; abortion is not a choice but a necessity.

Ann Furedi, Abortion Review, 23 April 2012

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Taxing our way to a fairer society?
Taxing our way to a fairer society?

Sunday 21 October, 3.15pm until 4.45pm, Conservatory

Not since the American Revolution has taxation been such a pressing political cause. Conservative chancellor George Osborne recently vowed to tackle the ‘shocking’ level of tax avoidance among the super rich. Lib Dem Danny Alexander called it ‘morally indefensible’. And Labour’s Ken Livingstone slammed the ‘rich bastards’ who ‘just don’t get it’, arguing that ‘no one should be allowed to vote in a British election, let alone sit in parliament, unless they pay their full share of tax’. It’s not just been a cause for the political mainstream. Youthful radicals UK Uncut have mounted a high-profile campaign against companies and individuals deemed to be cheating HMRC. Rarely it seems has the tax man, historically a figure of popular disdain, been so lauded - as comedian Jimmy Carr recently discovered to his cost. But what’s driving this obsession with how much tax people are paying?

For many, the issue is principally about fairness. ‘How would I explain to my secretary’, said ex-Marks and Spencer chairman Stuart Rose after a high-income tax cut last year, ‘that I am getting less tax on my income, which is palpably bigger than hers, when hers is not going down?’. Such concerns have come to the fore now, campaigners point out, because of the economic crisis. We are not all in this together, it seems. ‘The evidence of systematic tax avoidance by rich individuals and UK-based companies’, argued business secretary Vince Cable, ‘strikes a particularly ugly note in these straitened times’. Campaigners argue tax avoidance deprives the public purse of anything between £7 billion and £25 billion each year, and suggest recovering this money would reduce the need for cuts. But can a more rigorous taxation system really provide a solution to rising levels of public debt, let alone the economic crisis? If the recent calls for making people’s tax returns public are any indication, the tax crusaders are as keen on stigmatising wealth as redistributing it. As one columnist put it: ‘What is there to hide, except dishonesty or moral shame at earning multiples more than others who work as hard or harder?’ So is the campaign against tax avoidance driven by a desire to plant one on the nose of the rich for being, well, rich?

Is it a problem if the campaign against tax avoidance is more moralistic than practical? While exploiting loopholes to save money, or enjoying a lower level of top-rate income tax, may be legal, is it just? Should the rich be forced to give more to the tax man in the interests of fairness, or is this itself an unfair attack on people’s freedom to enjoy their own wealth?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Rowenna Davis
Labour councillor, Southwark; prospective parliamentary candidate for Southampton Itchen; author, Tangled Up in Blue

Rob Killick
CEO, Clerkswell; author, The UK After The Recession

Dominic Morris
director of group public affairs, Lloyds Banking Group

Lydia Prieg
researcher in finance and business, New Economics Foundation

Dr Jamie Whyte
philosopher and writer; author, Crimes Against Logic and Quack Policy

Chair:
Dr Tim Black
editor, Spiked Review

Produced by
Dr Tim Black editor, Spiked Review
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
Now we have to rely on the right to fight the feral rich

Let's hear it for Charles Moore, the Spectator and FT. Their attacks on the feral elite contrast with a virtually silent Labour

John Harris, Guardian, 9 September 2012

If tax avoidance is immoral, then our laws and our morals have parted ways

If something that is legal and above board is at the same time, as some have declared, unacceptable and immoral, then that sets up a fatal disjunction between law and morality

Peter Mullan, Daily Telegraph, 22 June 2012

In Defense of Jimmy Carr

Those Brits who call his tax scheme 'immoral' really just want more of the comedian's money.

Jamie Whyte, Wall Street Journal, 21 June 2012

Tax, that unlikely window on our politicians' souls

Forcing office-holders to be open about their finances is one part of the US system to which we should fervently aspire

Marina Hyde, Guardian, 6 April 2012

Is avoiding tax immoral?

There is a fine line between taking advantage of tax breaks explicitly created by the government to meet an economic or social purpose and taking cynical steps to deprive the state of its due

Robert Peston, BBC News, 20 September 2010

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Risk, regulation and red tape
Risk, regulation and red tape

Sunday 21 October, 3.15pm until 4.45pm, Cinema 1 Keynote Controversies

We often seem to struggle today to get the balance right between reasonable risk-taking and sensible precaution. It seems every new risk is met with ever-more petty, sometimes draconian, measures and laws. Excessive safety regulations threaten to make normal parts of life – like the humble school trip – increasingly impractical. At the same time, nobody wants to do away with sensible precautions that protect life and limb. Is there a danger that in a bid to free ourselves from excessive regulations, we might go to the opposite extreme and get burned in an unlicensed bonfire of red tape?

Whether it is the dangers of nuclear power, the risks of excessive drinking, the uncertainties around GM crops or the threat posed by trolls on Facebook, the mantra is always the same: ‘Better safe than sorry.’ And while more serious incidents may appear to demand action, policies often regulate far beyond the original cause. Recently, there has been some kick-back against this risk-averse culture, but for ‘common sense’ to prevail, we have to trust one another to exercise it, and trust powerful organisations and institutions to take public welfare seriously too. And who trusts corporations not to put profits first and safety second? Who trusts the media to self-regulate in the era of Leveson? Who argues banks should be free to take more risks in the wake of the financial crisis? And who trust bankers even to abide by existing regulations after the Libor rate-fixing scandal? Organisations have responded to the trust deficit by instituting procedures to minimise risk – and protect their reputations. So, for example, the scientific community champions the precautionary principle, even when it inhibits the scope of their own research. Or, in child-protection circles, many self-imposed regulations are seen as necessary to protect agencies in the event of something going wrong.

If we don’t take risks sometimes, how can we make progress, or even learn from our mistakes? At the same time, letting powerful organisations off the leash entirely might mean throwing out important regulations designed to protect the vulnerable from abuse. Might freeing firms from the red tape of employment law be a green light to unfair dismissal? When some procedural measures are designed to protect individuals from unwanted state intrusion, how much red tape can we afford to throw on the bonfire? How do we properly assess safety in an age in which both private and public bodies are encouraged to imagine the worst possible outcome, rather than prepare for what’s probable? Will more regulation help, or are there deeper cultural issues at stake?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Marco Amitrano
partner and head, risk assurance services, PwC

Josie Appleton
director, civil liberties group, Manifesto Club; author, Officious: Rise of the Busybody State

Nick Butler
visiting professor and chair, King's Policy Institute, King's College London; treasurer, the Fabian Society; former special advisor to Gordon Brown; former group vice-president, strategy and policy development, BP

Mark Littlewood
director general, Institute of Economic Affairs

Simon Nixon
chief European commentator, Wall Street Journal; author, The Credit Crunch: how safe is your money?

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
Live music red tape lifted for small venues

Venues in England and Wales with a capacity of under 200 people will no longer need a licence for live music.

BBC News, 1 October 2012

Michael Fallon: Brussels must cut red tape

Michael Fallon, Britain’s new business minister, is to demand that Brussels adopts the Government’s new “one-in, one-out” policy in an attempt to cut European red tape.

Louise Armistead, Daily Telegraph, 29 September 2012

Blunt scissors

Unfortunately, bemoaning red tape is easier than dealing with it

Economist, 22 September 2012

Employment law exemptions are key to unlocking growth for Challenger Businesses

To unleash growth for start-ups the government must create exemptions in employment law and simplify the enforcement of existing regulations, a new report, Red Tape Challenge – Challenger Businesses, suggests.

Institute of Economic Affairs, 20 September 2012

From drugs to banks to the web, the battle over regulation will continue

Deregulation gives people an excuse to dispense with thinking about anyone other than themselves. That's the last thing we need

Deborah Orr, Guardian Comment is free, 31 August 2012

Send in the clowns: Britain’s bizarre new laws

The hyperregulation of everyday life – from clown shows to live-music events to sipping wine in a park – speaks to a profound reorganisation of the relationship between state and society.

Josie Appleton, spiked review of books, 1 December 2010

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: What is the truth?
What is the truth?

Sunday 21 October, 3.15pm until 4.45pm, Pit Theatre

“You cannot hope to bribe or twist,
thank God! the British journalist.
But, seeing what the man will do
unbribed, there’s no occasion to.”

Humbert Wolfe’s ditty may have particular resonance today. But beyond cynicism about the untrustworthy meeja, the fourth estate is still expected to hold the powerful in check and enlighten the public on the realities behind appearances and spin. Whether in news, current affairs, documentary or investigative journalism, reporters have traditionally aimed at a degree of objectivity, apprising the facts and checking sources, while public service broadcasters have signed up to the notion of impartiality. But are such ideals illusory?

We were outraged by the plagiarism and fakery scandals that have dogged print and broadcast outlets of late. But while some journalists are condemned sarcastically for ‘never letting the facts get the way of a good story’, we have become accustomed to accepting less than the whole truth in other contexts. Docudramas, dramatic re-constructions of ‘true events’, even scripted ‘reality’ shows such as TOWIE and The Only Way is Chelsea are now treated with magnanimity. While the famous Guardian editor, CP Snow, once quipped ‘Comment is Free but facts are sacred’, many current affairs stories elide subjective views and opinion with news and dispassionate reporting. And we seem forgiving when crusading journalists claim the greater truth is more important than mere facts. Michael Moore readily admits his slippery journalistic standards, while winning awards and plaudits for his polemical films. Why make a fuss about errors in Al Gore’s BAFTA-winning film on the evils of global warming if it delivers a powerful truth that will help save the planet? When upwards of 40 million people watched Kony 2012, a film that has made the world aware of child soldiers in Africa, does it matter if it was littered with factual confusions?

Maybe the idea of a golden age of objective news is a naive myth, and it’s time to drop any pretence. Nigel Andrews asked in the FT, ‘Do we still buy, if we ever did, the notion that non-fiction on-screen is anything other than an artefact?’ Not only has the openly polemical Fox News challenged the status quo, but Channel 4’s opinionated reporting has many admirers on the opposite side of the political divide. The BBC is regularly accused of bias by all sides. Some make a virtue of ‘attached’ journalism and campaigning documentaries, arguing that at least audiences get closer to partial truths. Others fear impartiality distorts truth by an obligation to give equal weight to quacks and sceptics to balance up experts armed with factually proven evidence. Should we drop the old idea that journalism shouldn’t indulge in opinion, but simply equip people with the information to make up their own minds ? Is seeking the truth too grand an aim for the media? Is impartiality the enemy or ally of truthful journalism? Are today’s journalists trustworthy enough to deliver truth anyway?

Speakers
Ruth Dudley Edwards
historian and journalist; author, The Seven: the lives and legacies of the founding fathers of the Irish Republic (forthcoming)

Nick Fraser
commissioning editor, Storyville, BBC; series editor, Why Democracy?; executive producer, Why Poverty?; author, Why Documentaries Matter

Peter Grimsdale
former Channel 4, Five and BBC commissioning editor; credits include Crimewatch, Big Brother and Dispatches; thriller writer, co-author, Battlefield 3 - The Russian (with Andy McNab)

Mick Hume
editor-at-large, online magazine spiked; author, Trigger Warning: Is the Fear of Being Offensive Killing Free Speech?

John McAndrew
associate editor, Sky News

Chair:
Dolan Cummings
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
Don't Fall for the Crocodile Tears of the Hillsborough Hypocrites

Following the publication of the damning report on the Hillsborough disaster, there have been paroxysms of handwringing in the political and media classes.

Brendan O'Neill, Huffington Post, 13 September 2012

The war between fact and fallacy in US politics

Inadvertently, a high-ranking conservative Republican has captured the political zeitgeist. During budget debates earlier this month about reproductive healthcare provider Planned Parenthood, Arizona senator Jon Kyle was caught falsely insisting on the Senate floor that providing abortions is ‘well over 90 per cent of what Planned Parenthood does’

Wendy Kaminer, spiked, 27 April 2012

Journalism’s First Obligation Is to Tell the Truth

Excerpt from

Bill Kovach and Tom Rosenstiel, Nieman Reports, 2001

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Character: skill or virtue?
Character: skill or virtue?

Sunday 21 October, 3.15pm until 4.45pm, Garden Room

‘Give me the child until he is seven and I will show you the man.’ So claimed Jesuit leader Ignatius Loyola. A recent Demos report agreed the early years are ‘the critical ones’, making parents the ‘primary character builders in society’. And the report this year by the Riots, Communities and Victims Panel called on schools to demonstrate how they are building pupils’ characters. There has been a resurgence of interest in ‘character’ and how it is formed, particularly in behavioural science – for example, how to stimulate the ‘forgiveness instinct’ by creating the right environment - and psychology. Is there really a crisis of character today? If not, why do so many think there is?

Character traditionally was seen as a matter of possessing virtues such as courage and wisdom. For Aristotle, in particular, excellence of character rested on the ability to make the right choice, determined by practical reason, between two extremes. Today it is often defined in terms of ‘capabilities’ like resilience, optimism, stoicism, altruism, emotional regulation and so on. Nevertheless, sceptics argue none of these can be taught, but are the outcome of moral choices, life experience, or are simply ‘virtues’.  Yet, encouraged by positive psychologists, even religious groups like the American Templeton Foundation are turning to positive psychology and neuroscience for more robust evidence about how to develop character in schools.

If science can help us teach character in this way though, even make our characters for us, does it take away our responsibility for the type of people we are, the lives we choose to lead? If being responsible is a key element of character, might it be the case that character is actually formed in adult life, after childhood? Should society even be in the business of assessing us as individuals, analysing what character deficiencies we might have? Are schools teaching character in fact practising indoctrination? Or is trying to assist the formation of our character with the latest science no more problematic than toning our muscles in the gym – the equivalent of a moral workout? Is it maybe even necessary in modern societies so riven by moral relativism that no grounds for agreement, other than scientific, exist?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Ruth Gledhill
religion correspondent, The Times; journalism tutor, City University

Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination

Kristján Kristjánsson
professor, character education and virtue ethics, Jubilee Centre for Character and Values, University of Birmingham

Ian Morris
head of wellbeing, Wellington College

Chair:
Kathryn Ecclestone
professor of education, University of Sheffield; author, Governing Vulnerable Subjects in a Therapeutic Age (forthcoming)

Produced by
Kathryn Ecclestone professor of education, University of Sheffield; author, Governing Vulnerable Subjects in a Therapeutic Age (forthcoming)
Recommended readings
From emotional and psychological well-being to character education

The recent revival of an old discourse of ‘character’ reinforces a search for better measurement as the basis for behaviour change strategies reflected in government interest in new ideas from behavioural science.

Kathryn Ecclestone, Research Papers in Education, September 2012

Can we teach moral character?

The Barclays scandal can tell teachers a lot about character education says GTP student Alex Crossman, as he reflects on his experience of working in the City

Alex Crossman, Guardian, 4 July 2012

Teaching Happiness and Well-Being in Schools

There has recently been an explosion of interest in positive psychology and the teaching of well-being and 'happiness' in the PSHE world in schools and many teachers are looking for clear information on how to implement these potentially life-changing ideas in the classroom.

Ian Morris, Continuum, 6 February 2011

There’s more to human character than sharing toys

The idea that rearing children is just about maximising their ‘happiness’, or stopping them from becoming fat, or enabling them to take a few calculated risks, might all make some sense on a personal, daily level, but it seems thoroughly inadequate in terms of a generational project.

Jennie Bristow, spiked, 16 November 2009

Building Character

“Parents are the principal architects of a fairer society...”

Jen Lexmond & Richard Reeves, Demos, 2009

The seven deadly personality disorders

With lust relabelled ‘sex addiction’ and gluttony turned into an ‘eating disorder’, it’s no wonder Catholics are unsure about the seven deadly sins

Frank Furedi, spiked, 12 March 2008

Aristotle, Emotions, and Education

What can Aristotle teach us that is relevant to contemporary moral and educational concerns? What can we learn from him about the nature of moral development, the justifiability and educability of emotions, the possibility of friendship between parents and their children, or the fundamental aims of teaching?

Kristjan Kristjansson, Ashgate, 8 August 2007

Happy talk

While experts may have cracked what it is that makes us miserable, psychologists, politicians and scientists are now very much in pursuit of happiness. Phil Hogan tries to look on the bright side and investigates whether wellbeing can be taught

Phil Hogan, Observer, 25 March 2007

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: London book launch and discussion: <i>Snobs' Law: criminalising football fans in an age of intolerance</i>
London book launch and discussion: Snobs' Law: criminalising football fans in an age of intolerance

Sunday 21 October, 3.15pm until 4.45pm, Hammerson Room

Dr Stuart Waiton, a sociology and criminology lecturer at the University of Abertay Dundee and founder of Take a Liberty (Scotland) will discuss his new book Snobs’ Law: criminalising football fans in an age of intolerance.

A generation ago football players ‘telling tales’ on one another for name calling, or fans being fi ned and arrested for singing offensive songs would have been unimaginable. The New laws and regulations in football are portrayed as modern and tolerant.  However, should offensive words be made illegal? Is this part of a progressive fight against bigotry? Or are these developments authoritarian and infantilising – creating a situation where grown men are treated, and encouraged to act like children who tell tales on one another? Snobs’ Law is an examination of the way football fans are regulated. Developed initially around an attempt to understand the Offensive Behaviour at Football and Threatening Communication (Scotland) Bill, it begins by looking at the way fans were policed in the 1980s by the old conservative establishment who caged fans like animals and were ultimately responsible for the deaths at Hillsborough. This is is done to contrast past forms of control with those being introduced by the ‘cosmopolitan elite’, a less overtly elitist, politically correct bunch, who are more preoccupied with controlling our minds than our bodies. Words, as John Terry, Luis Suarez and Stephen Birrell have found out, are treated today as though they are weapons, and the ‘offensive’ use of them can result in the loss of liberty.

Speakers
Dr Stuart Waiton
lecturer in sociology and criminology, Abertay University; author, Snobs' Law: criminalising football fans in an age of intolerance

Chair:
Kevin Rooney
politics teacher and head of social science, Queen's School, Bushey; co-author, Who's Afraid Of The Easter Rising?

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
Snobs' Law: Criminalising Football Fans in an Age of Intolerance

A generation ago football players 'telling tales' on one another for name calling, or fans being fined and arrested for singing offensive songs would have been unimaginable. Today the new laws and regulations in football are portrayed as modern and tolerant.

Stuart Waiton, Take A Liberty (Scotland), 30 March 2012


Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: To build or not to build?
To build or not to build?

Sunday 21 October, 3.15pm until 4.45pm, Fountain Room

From Boris Island to the Dale Farm gypsies, no building project seems too big or small to fall foul of the UK’s notoriously stringent planning laws, which sometimes seem to exist to prevent development rather than manage it. In contrast to China, which delivers new development equivalent to a country the size of Greece every six months, the UK planning system seems to be in a permanent state of denial. The Thames Gateway, High Speed Rail 2, Heathrow’s third runway, Battersea Power Station redux, Green Belt housing and even Eco-Towns have all run up against a wall. Perhaps the biggest issue is in housing, where building languishes at the lowest levels since the First World War. By some estimates, five million people are waiting on housing registers. According to Shelter, the younger generation bears the brunt with a fifth of 18- to 34-year-olds living with their parents because they can’t afford to rent or buy a home.

At Inside Housing, Colin Wiles argues the need to build three million new homes on greenfield land in the next 20 years. But few others seem willing to countenance actually increasing housing stock. The charity Intergenerational Foundation argues the problem is ‘under-occupation’ and that elderly people should be encouraged to move out of their ‘big houses’ to make room for larger families. Eight ‘radical solutions’ to the housing crisis discussed on the BBC News website included curbing population growth, forcing landlords to sell or let empty properties, and banning second homes. Meanwhile, the likes of the National Trust, the Countryside Alliance and the Campaign to Protect Rural England campaign against any liberalisation of planning. More broadly, many people distrust developers, fearing they will scar the countryside and destroy our architectural heritage.

Some ask why has planning lost its way and what happened to the big visionary plans of the past. David Cameron wants us to rediscover how ‘to build for the future with as much confidence and ambition as the Victorians once did’. But will cutting ‘red tape’ and simplifying the system be enough? Does the new ‘presumption in favour of sustainable development’ merely reinforce the ‘green tape’ that is already a barrier to development? What are the smart ways to deliver good urban development? Is the solution better top-down planning, more bottom-up planning, or something else altogether?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Professor Kelvin Campbell
managing director, Urban Initiatives; author, Massive Small: the operating system for smart urbanism

Penny Lewis
lecturer, Scott Sutherland School of Architecture, Robert Gordon University; co-founder, AE Foundation

Paul Miner
senior planning officer, Campaign to Protect Rural England

Daniel Moylan
former deputy chairman of Transport for London; Conservative Councillor; co-chairman, Urban Design London

Christine Murray
editor in chief, The Architects' Journal and The Architectural Review; founder, Women in Architecture Awards

Chair:
Michael Owens
commercial director, Bow Arts Trust; owner, London Urban Visits; formerly, head of development policy, London Development Agency

Produced by
Michael Owens commercial director, Bow Arts Trust; owner, London Urban Visits; formerly, head of development policy, London Development Agency
Recommended readings
Getting planners off our backs

When planners view their mission as a civilising one, then the aim of building public space must be to eradicate behaviour that doesn't accord with perceived civic values.

Alastair Donald, Future Cities Project, 22 September 2012

Anne Power and Claire Fox: is this the end of social housing?

The National Housing Federation conference ends with a debate on the biggest question of them all – are housing professionals facing the demise of the sector?

Hannah Fearn, Guardian, 19 September 2012

Time to come clean on planning

As the LGA feigns outrage at the Government’s accusation that town halls have blocked development, Claire Fox asks if the sector is being a little disingenuous

Claire Fox, MJ, 13 September 2012

Rising to the Capital's Housing Challenge

How did housing become so difficult? Our basic instinct is to create shelter, but today we seem unable to do so. We have a massive problem and things are not getting better.

Smart Urbanism, 9 August 2012

London's Social Cleansing

Unscrupulous landlords are forcing poorer tenants out of their London homes, freeing them up to rent out to visitors to the Olympics this summer, according to the housing charity Shelter.

James Heartfield, newgeography, 14 May 2012

Hands Off Our Land: Enough 'brownfield land' to build 1.5million new homes, CPRE claims

The amount of previously developed land is growing at a faster rate than it is being used up, according to a report published today.

Christopher Hope, Daily Telegraph, 12 November 2011

Remembering Jane Jacobs

Jacobs stood in that great American tradition of celebrating the freedom on the individual, the right to privacy and the capacity of autonomous individuals to get along together as part of city life.

Penny Lewis, Foundation for Architecture and Education, September 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Students: consumers at the heart of a university?
Students: consumers at the heart of a university?

Sunday 21 October, 3.15pm until 4.45pm, Frobisher 4-6

With universities now charging tuition fees of up to £9000 a year, many now claim students should be regarded as consumers of higher education. While this prospect horrifies traditionalists, its advocates argue students’ desire to get their money’s worth will drive up quality and help modernise and democratise an old-fashioned education system.

Consumer-minded students are fully conversant with their rights, and increasingly assert those rights through formal complaints procedures. And the ‘student voice’ movement advocated by the NUS also argues that student satisfaction should be at the heart of university life. Behind the bluster of those on either side of the fees debate, from universities minister David Willetts to student protesters, from free marketers to social includers, there is a great deal of consensus, especially around the notion that all students are entitled to a university degree. Even academics seem keen to acknowledge the importance of students’ satisfaction, even over the pursuit and expansion of knowledge. Student satisfaction surveys are now institutionalised, and play a dominant part in the organisation of higher education: scoring highly is considered an important endorsement of any university’s value.

Nevertheless, critics charge that the consumer culture is turning university education on its head, putting the least qualified in charge. Students are often not in a position to distinguish between run-of-the-mill and quality education, let alone demand a concrete outcome from the pursuit of higher study. The embrace of a consumerist ethos implies a role reversal between the authority of the teacher and the student. Traditionally, the customer is always right, but surely this puts academics under pressure to avoid giving low grades, and to offer flattery instead of frank feedback. Are we encouraging students to believe that because they have paid for their education, they are entitled to demand satisfaction and a decent degree, to view knowledge acquisition as a transaction? In the marketplace, it is not the service providers’ job to question or challenge the tastes and values of potential customers. So what are the consequences for academics, who traditionally are in the business of educating their students’ tastes and encouraging them to question their values? Or is it no longer possible to uphold the ideal of the university as the province of an academic elite dedicated to the pursuit of knowledge, with students as an afterthought?

 

Speakers
Aaron Porter
higher-education consultant and freelance journalist; former NUS president

Dr Duna Sabri
visiting research fellow, department of Education & Professional Studies, King's College, London

Dr Joanna Williams
academic; author, Academic Freedom in an Age of Conformity; education editor, spiked

Professor Michael Young
Emeritus Professor of Education, UCL Institute of Education

Chair:
Dr Shirley Lawes
researcher; consultant and university teacher, specialising in teacher education and modern foreign languages; Chevalier dans l’ordre des Palmes Académiques

Produced by
Dr Shirley Lawes researcher; consultant and university teacher, specialising in teacher education and modern foreign languages; Chevalier dans l’ordre des Palmes Académiques
Dr Joanna Williams academic; author, Academic Freedom in an Age of Conformity; education editor, spiked
Recommended readings
Don't give up the day job to help them secure day jobs

Scholar bemoans impact of employability agenda on academic standards. Matthew Reisz reports

Matthew Reisz, Times Higher Education, 11 October 2012

New students should seek education, not satisfaction

A fresher on the joys of exchanging a rigid and prescriptive curriculum for learning through free-form debate.

James Shaw, Independent Voices, 10 October 2012

The 'gold standard' of Grayling is not struck from an Oxbridge mint

New College of the Humanities' pedagogic model has only a passing resemblance to the ancient universities' teaching

Julia Horn, Times Higher Education, 13 September 2012

Reassuringly expensive

Fees needn't mean the end of scholarly values: for US students, putting a price on learning just makes it more desirable.

Felipe Fernández-Armesto, Times Higher Education, 31 August 2012

How students are mis-sold the benefits of university

What do you say to an Arts graduate? ‘Big Mac and fries, please!’

Fraser Nelson, Spectator, 17 August 2012

Consumerism in higher education: the rise of the helicopter parent

Parental intervention was once a rare occurrence in higher education. Not any more. Afshan Jafar shares her experiences of dealing with a consumerist HE culture

Afshan Jafar, Guardian, 23 January 2012

AC Grayling's private university is odious

The money-grubbing dons signing up at the £18k a year New College of the Humanities are the thin edge of an ugly wedge

Terry Eagleton, Guardian, 6 June 2011

Maintain standards? That's way more than my job's worth

In today's insecure academy, quality control takes a back seat to pleasing students and covering up errors, a senior lecturer claims

Times Higher Education, 17 March 2011

The Wal-Mart ethos attracts few buyers among US lecturers

Staff chafe but administrators press on with efforts to instil consumer focus.

Jon Marcus, Times Higher Education, 27 January 2011

The student-customer is not always right

Lord Browne’s idea that student feedback surveys should shape education is a bigger shock than the proposed hike in fees.

Joanna Williams, spiked, 3 November 2010

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: The 21st-century case for freedom
The 21st-century case for freedom

Sunday 21 October, 1.30pm until 2.45pm, Barbican Theatre Keynote Controversies

‘A society that puts equality (...) ahead of freedom will end up with neither equality nor freedom’, Milton Friedman

‘Freedom for the pike is death to the minnows’, RH Tawney

Freedom has been the subject of political contestation from ancient Greece onwards. Arguably, it is the very basis of politics. Without freedom, there is no choice. Freedom allows us – even challenges us - to make of ourselves what we will. Yet we appear very uncomfortable with the idea of freedom today.

The economic crisis is blamed on free-market, neoliberal ideologues desperately in need of restraint and regulation. Should big business have the ‘freedom’ to exploit and pollute? In a society that struggles to cope with uncertainty and yearns for security, freedom can appear to come at too high a cost: solidarity and equality seem more attractive than liberty. In this context, for example, seeking freedom from the burden of taxation is seen as grossly irresponsible. And what about inequality? Are those who don’t have the choices and opportunities that others have to be left behind? Should majorities have the freedom to oppress minorities? To this way of thinking, one man’s free speech is another’s hate speech. The freedom of religious conscience can be a screen for bigotry and discrimination, even abuse.

The contemporary mood of fatalism, of things being essentially what they are, seems to dominate our existence. Free will is now frequently derided as an illusion, a mere matter of neurochemical determinism, something susceptible to both a governmental nudge and advert-driven brainwashing. The old saying, ‘it’s a free country’, no longer seems so obvious or uncontroversial. And indeed, from the ubiquity of surveillance to bans on smoking in public places, contemporary curbs on freedom are often welcomed as being for our own good. Freedom is, it is true, always relative to unfreedom. There is always a trade-off to be made between freedom and security. That said, if we do not operate under the ideal of freedom, do we make a virtue of unfreedom? If we overplay our vulnerability at the expense of moral independence, are we simply seeking comfort in conformism to the status quo? Arguably, this is to remove the very basis of democratic politics: something that can only come into being when we are freed to some degree from necessity. If there is any truth to the idea that we are born in freedom, that we have no choice but to be free, what must we make of our freedom in the rest of the century?

Speakers
Natalie Bennett
newly elected leader, Green Party of England and Wales; London Assembly candidate; chair, Green Party Women; former editor, Guardian Weekly

Professor Frank Furedi
sociologist and social commentator; author, What's Happened to the University?, Power of Reading: from Socrates to Twitter, On Tolerance and Authority: a sociological history

Rob Riemen
writer and cultural philosopher; founder & president, Netherlands-based Nexus Institute; author, Nobility of Sprit: a forgotten ideal and The Eternal Return of Fascism

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Recommended readings
Web freedom faces greatest threat ever, warns Google's Sergey Brin

Threats range from governments trying to control citizens to the rise of Facebook and Apple-style 'walled gardens'

Ian Katz, Guardian, 15 April 2012

This bastardised libertarianism makes 'freedom' an instrument of oppression

It's the disguise used by those who wish to exploit without restraint, denying the need for the state to protect the 99%

George Monbiot, Guardian, 19 December 2011

On Tolerance: a defence of moral independence

Outwardly, we live in an era that appears more open-minded, non-judgemental and tolerant than in any time in human history. The very term intolerant invokes moral condemnation. We are constantly reminded to understand the importance of respecting different cultures and diversities. In this pugnacious new book, Frank Furedi argues that despite the democratisation of public life and the expansion of freedom, society is dominated by a culture that not only tolerates but often encourages intolerance.

Frank Furedi, Continuum, 1 August 2011

Nobility of Spirit: a forgotten ideal

Without nobility of spirit, culture vanishes. Yet, in the early twenty-first century, a time when human dignity and freedom are imperiled, the concept of nobility of spirit is scarcely mentioned.

Rob Riemen, Yale University Press, 16 October 2009


Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with


Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Free schools: myth and reality
Free schools: myth and reality

Sunday 21 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Frobisher 4-6

With 24 ‘free schools’ open, and another 79 on the way, it seems education minister Michael Gove has struck a nerve by inviting parents to ‘go it alone’. Free schools are so called because they are independent of local education authorities, receiving money direct from the Department of Education, though critics suggest that money too comes with strings attached. Nevertheless, that so many ‘amateurs’ have chosen to go through the meticulous and demanding process indicates Free Schools have caught the popular imagination. If David Cameron’s Big Society is dead, Gove’s army of would-be educators is definitely alive and kicking.

Despite this seeming grassroots support, critics have been vociferous in their opposition. Although a mere 100 new schools hardly represent a threat to the 25,000 state schools in Britain, the Campaign for State Education ominously talks of privatisation as the secret agenda. This suspicion has been fuelled further by the conservative think tank Policy Exchange advising the government that the way to make free schools take off is to allow private companies to become stakeholders. Is this an admission that setting up a school is not a viable proposition without corporate backing? Does pushing for the profit motive to enter the mix undermine the idea of altruistic parents and teachers working together only driven by academic excellence and so on? Meanwhile, supporters of universal state provision of schools, such as Fiona Millar, Melissa Benn and Francis Gilbert have set up the Local Schools Network, arguing that the middle classes will use these free schools to opt out of mainstream educational provision, leading to greater social segregation. Others, such as the British Humanist Association fear the schools are being hijacked by social interest groups, citing the fact that seven of a recent tranche of 10 applications had religious connections, raising the prospect of creationist schools.

Might opponents of free schools be viewing a positive initiative through jaundiced eyes? Is there a danger that seeing the worst of motives in those fed up with inadequate state provision may be its own form of elitism? As if the state is always a better provider of social goods, in preference to independent groups of passionate activists? While today it is social progressives who are most often champions of state education, might not free schools take their inspiration from the radical tradition of nineteenth-century socialist, cooperative and Chartist ‘secular Sunday schools’, which cherished their independence from the state? Or are the aspirations of parents for a better education than that on offer from the bog-standard comp being exploited by forces with hidden agendas? Are free schools a Trojan horse for a less free and more unequal society?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Tom Burkard
research fellow, Centre for Policy Studies; visiting professor of education policy, University of Derby; project leader, Phoenix Free School of Oldham

Pavan Dhaliwal
head of public affairs, British Humanist Association

David Perks
founder and principal, East London Science School; director, the Physics Factory

Michael Shaw
programme director for online learning, TES

Chair:
Dr Mark Taylor
vice principal, East London Science School; London convenor, IoI Education Forum

Produced by
David Perks founder and principal, East London Science School; director, the Physics Factory
Recommended readings
What's really driving the Left's loathing of free schools

In the modern Left’s worldview, if the state isn’t permanently on standby with its ready-made list of values, bucketloads of welfare cash, parenting advice and whatnot, then ordinary people will starve, go mad, turn racist and end up as fodder for fascism.

Brendan O'Neill, Daily Telegraph, 8 October 2012

Labour conference: Free schools 'fascism' claim

A teaching union chief has accused Education Secretary Michael Gove of risking an increase in

Brian Wheeler, BBC News, 4 October 2012

Class acts

England’s schools are radically different. Now make them better

Economist, 15 September 2012

IoI Education Forum debate on Free Schools

Podcast of the recent Battle Satellite on Free Schools, held in conjunction with the IoI Education Forum

Education Forum, 4 October 2010

Free Schools can close the ever-widening gap between state and private education

If the government uses the pupil premium to give children eligible for free school meals a voucher worth £10,000 or more, that could transform the life chances of the very poorest children. It is policies like that that will shrink the attainment gap between children of the rich and the poor, not pouring money into shiny new school buildings.

Toby Young, Daily Telegraph blogs, 16 August 2010

Free schools will mean better schools. Perfectly fair

The left has always been allergic to independence from the state, but in this case it cannot claim that independence means unfairness

Minette Marrin, The Sunday Times, 31 May 2010

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: The Giants of Asia
The Giants of Asia

Sunday 21 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Cinema 1 Lunchtime Debates

With their huge populations and buoyant growth rates, China and India are two of the economic and technological powerhouses of the twenty-first century. And though many seem to forget it after the Lost Decade, Japan is the third largest economy in the world, the second largest developed economy and the world’s largest creditor nation. Its GDP per capita growth in the past 10 years still outpaced Europe and the United States. Nevertheless, all three countries have giant problems, too. China’s property and banking sectors raise some worrying questions. In Japan, Toyota is back, but to turn Sony round will require a miracle. In India, scandals around licences for 2G telephone networks, and the sale of coal assets, have reduced the state to impotence – while in the countryside, despite improvements, child malnutrition continues. Nor do the three giants get on. They dispute borders (China-India), as well as maritime boundaries and islands (China-Japan). Moreover, to its two rivals, China looks too friendly towards countries like Pakistan and North Korea.

For America, China saves too much, consumes too little, steals US innovations, engages in cyber-war, runs its currency too cheap, hoards rare earth metals, and tramples on human rights. For many environmentalists, the industrialisation and motorisation of China and India is a step too far for a fragile planet. Meanwhile Japan still takes flak for its resistance to inward investment, immigration, women’s rights and political reform. Despite the opportunities it sees in Asia, the West can seem fundamentally disdainful of the giants there.

The West perhaps underestimates China’s growing consumer class, and China’s powers of innovation. But can the country’s leader-in-waiting, Xi Jinping, control property and the banks enough to prevent social and economic turmoil – turmoil that Wen Jiabao, his forerunner, warned could be as great as that of the Cultural Revolution? Can Japan’s economy, now effectively nuclear-free, really avoid a third ‘lost decade’ of zombie banks and ineffectual governments? David Cameron has high hopes for UK plc in India. But can India’s own ineffectual government restore growth – or will the country’s general election, due by 2014, lay bare the country’s wasted years for all to see? Will the giants of Asia stumble in the face of the US rebound? And when might Asian production finally and decisively shift to low-cost Indonesia, Bangladesh and Vietnam?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Professor Barry Buzan
emeritus professor, LSE; author, The United States and the Great Powers: world politics in the twenty-first century

James Woudhuysen
visiting professor, London South Bank University

Dr Linda Yueh
fellow in economics, St Edmund Hall, University of Oxford; adjunct professor of economics, London Business School; economics editor, Bloomberg TV

Chair:
Phil Mullan
economist and business manager; author, Creative Destruction: How to start an economic renaissance

Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
James Woudhuysen visiting professor, London South Bank University
Recommended readings
The summer Davos blues

Global movers and shakers are worried about China

Economist, 15 September 2012

What Roosevelt would do in the South China Sea

Planting flags on islets, declaring cities where there are too few residents to fill a restaurant, and huffing and puffing over uninhabited rocks are acts more suited to a Gilbert and Sullivan farce than to nations in the 21st century.

James Clad and Robert Manning, Financial Times, 4 September 2012

Big trouble in the East China Sea

A row between Japan, China and Taiwan over a few small islands reveals the arbitrariness of international relations.

James Woudhuysen, spiked, 3 September 2012

Friend, enemy, rival, investor

How can India make its economic relations with China less lopsided?

Economist, 30 June 2012

The Economy of China

The emergence of China since 1979 has been a hallmark in the global economy, not only in the past but also in this century. This comprehensive book provides an analytical view of the remarkable economic development of the most exciting economy in the world.

Linda Yueh, Edward Elgar Publishing, 31 January 2012

Rivals: How the Power Struggle Between China, India and Japan Will Shape Our Next Decade

"Rivals" looks at: How the power struggle between China, India and Japan will shape our next decade, will explore the legacies of history, the likely future trajectories of China, Japan and India, and the potential collisions and intersections between them which will shape the 21st century.

Bill Emmott, Allen Lane, 3 April 2008


Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: From the Colosseum to Wembley: crowd watching through the ages
From the Colosseum to Wembley: crowd watching through the ages

Sunday 21 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Fountain Room

From the Colosseum of Rome to the modern football stadiums of today, the behaviour of crowds has often been a matter of moral and political concern. In Ancient Rome, thousands roared their approval as gladiators fought to the death against each other and against wild beasts. This year the Scottish government has enacted the Offensive Behaviour at Football Act to prevent fans from chanting songs which could cause offence to others. The booing of Tomas Berdych after he refused to shake hands with his opponent at the Australian Open tennis this year came in for much criticism. Beyond sport, traces of historic concerns about the urban mob can be seen in the tight policing not only of political demonstrations, but any mass public gatherings, from New Year celebrations to summer gatherings in parks, especially when alcohol is involved.

But are the seething multitudes really such a problem? Why shouldn’t sporting crowds be able to show their passion and even vent some spleen. If they have paid their money, haven’t they got a right to sing traditional songs, insult the opposition and revel in the misfortune of others. In the case of Berdych, it could be argued that it was the crowd which upheld the spirit of tennis against an overly sensitive player. And surely lively, sometimes raucous gatherings in public space, from the Notting Hill Carnival to flash mobs, are a sign of a healthy and vibrant social life. In contrast, many argue that individuals in a crowd should not be allowed to behave in a way which is not acceptable in normal life. If a fan sings an offensive song or makes an abusive gesture why should they be able to get away with it at a football match but not on the Clapham omnibus? If children and an international audience are watching, surely it is best to mind your Ps and Qs. For some, there is a thin line between an unregulated street party and a criminal riot.

Is the banter at football fixtures all part of life’s rich tapestry, such that we should all just grow a thicker skin? And shouldn’t we be encouraging people to come together in public at a time when many fear society has become atomised and individuated? Do we need stricter regulation of how people behave in large groups, or should crowds be left to police themselves? Isn’t it all just bread and circuses anyway?

Speakers
Dr Shirley Dent
communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake

Dr John Drury
senior lecturer, social psychology, University of Sussex; co-editor, Crowds in the 21st century: perspectives from contemporary social science (forthcoming)

Kevin Rooney
politics teacher and head of social science, Queen's School, Bushey; co-author, Who's Afraid Of The Easter Rising?

Chair:
Geoff Kidder
director, membership and events, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Book Club; IoI’s resident expert in all sporting matters

Produced by
Geoff Kidder director, membership and events, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Book Club; IoI’s resident expert in all sporting matters
Recommended readings
The Mask of Anarchy

Written on the occasion of the massacre carried out by the British Government at Peterloo, Manchester 1819

Percy Bysshe Shelley,

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Public inquiries in the dock
Public inquiries in the dock

Sunday 21 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Pit Theatre

In the years between the late-1990s Macpherson Inquiry into the death of Stephen Lawrence and the current Leveson Inquiry into press ethics, something strange has happened. The public inquiry, once a recourse of political last resort, has increasingly come to play a prominent role in British political life. Rarely a week passes without a politician calling for an inquiry into something or other, be it a dodgy expense form, the fiddling of the Libor rate, or somebody’s wife’s speeding ticket. It does now seem that where the authority of politicians is often in doubt, the authority of the public inquiry is unquestioned. But ought it to be unquestioned? Is the rise of the public inquiry as undiluted a good as its champions claim?

For advocates of the public inquiry, its appeal seems straightforward: it represents an impartial way to establish the truth. Not only that, it also provides a judgement on the rights and wrongs of an issue that comes from above the partisan and partial sphere of politics. The judgement of a public inquiry is a judgement, it seems, that can be trusted. But how true is this? And is there something to be concerned about when the political sphere is bypassed in favour of the views of the judiciary and specially selected inquiry panel members? It may be called a public inquiry, but the public play no role in the formation of an inquiry’s judgement. We become little more than spectators, able to view the exercise of expert judgement, but with no means to influence it.

And what of politics? Aspects of the invasion of Iraq in 2003, for instance, have been the object of three separate public inquiries since the Hutton report into the death of weapons-expert David Kelly. For those who called for these inquiries, they represented a de facto opportunity to establish once and for all whether the UK was right to invade Iraq. But ought it really to be inquiry panel members judging the rectitude or not of the events leading up to the Iraq war? Would it not be better if politicians, and ultimately, those they represent, the public, were to hold the government to account? In the enthusiasm for public inquiries, is political and moral judgement being outsourced to experts?


Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
John Cooper
leading criminal and human rights barrister; regular columnist, The Times and Observer; editor, Criminal Bar Quarterly

Jon Holbrook
barrister; writer on legal issues; regular contributor to spiked

Lee Hughes
consultant, Alexander Litvinenko inquest; secretary, Hutton Inquiry

Chair:
Richard Reynolds
trainee barrister; formerly, paralegal, Baha Mousa and Al Sweady Public Inquiries; founder, Student Academics for Academic Freedom

Produced by
Richard Reynolds trainee barrister; formerly, paralegal, Baha Mousa and Al Sweady Public Inquiries; founder, Student Academics for Academic Freedom
Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Why isn't poverty history yet?
Why isn't poverty history yet?

Sunday 21 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Conservatory

The issue of world poverty was once dominated by number-crunching development economists and worthy aid organisations, but in recent years the likes of Bono and Bob Geldof have made it a sexy subject. In July 2005, hundreds of actors, musicians and celebrities performed at ‘Live 8’ concerts around the world in order to hold the G8 to UN Millennium Development Goal 1.A - a commitment to halve the number of people living on less than $1 a day by 2015. So what happened to ‘Make Poverty History’? China has reduced its population in poverty from 452m to 278m. China, Brazil, and South Africa are now aid givers. But sub-Saharan Africa has made barely any progress. Adrian Lovett, director of the anti-poverty movement One, fears it may become even more difficult as money that could be going to Africa is poured into European bank bailouts. Poverty ‘over there’ may be less of a worry than poverty ‘over here’.

In the UK, child poverty is said to affect one in three children, one of the highest rates in the developed world. In the US, where the poverty level is set at a yearly income of $23,050 for a family of four, 12.2 per cent of Americans lived in poverty in 2000, and 15.1 per cent in 2011. The majority of Americans can expect to spend at least one year of their lives below the poverty line. Shocking images of Americans living in tent cities, even storm drains, have become familiar. While this is of course shocking, some detect a certain schadenfreude about what happens when a society commits itself to the bottom line of material advancement. Should we care about those who try but don’t make it anywhere? And is it fair to expect much interest in global poverty when some feel charity begins at home?

Poverty is relative, as indicated by the different definition in the West. And some feel inequality is the real injustice, that the poor are condemned to stay poor because the rich have pulled the ladders of social mobility up behind them, with CEOs paid hundreds of times more than the immigrant labourers cleaning their toilets. Would we make a real step towards abolishing poverty if we ironed out the differences between people first, and created a fairer society rather than worrying about creating a richer society? And is putting the spotlight on the very poorest people in the world something of a luxury for the relatively well-off in the developed world, too far-sighted to notice the poverty on their doorsteps? Or is it a moral imperative for us all if we are to create a truly equal world? Is concern for poverty, at home or abroad, just liberal hand-wringing? Can poverty ever be history?

Speakers
Daniel Ben-Ami
journalist and author, Ferraris for All: in defence of economic progress and Cowardly Capitalism

Brian Hill
film director, Century Films; director, Drinking for England, Feltham Sings, forthcoming Storyville 'Why Poverty?' documentary Welcome to the World

Jonathan Portes
principle research fellow National Institute of Economic and Social Research (NIESR); senior fellow, UK in a Changing Europe; author, 50 Capitalism Ideas You Really Need to Know

Chair:
Para Mullan
senior project manager, Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development; FCIPD

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Para Mullan senior project manager, Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development; FCIPD
Recommended readings
Rule of law can rid the world of poverty

Poverty is on the retreat. Despite the global economic downturn, the World Bank and UN reported this year that the number of people living in extreme poverty has dropped in every region of the world for the first time since record keeping began. Though progress on the UN’s Millennium Development Goals has been uneven, we should be heartened that we have already reached, three years before the target date of 2015, the first of these eight goals.

George Soros and Fazle Hasan Abed, Financial Times, 26 September 2012

For the Marxists ye have with you always

Capitalism was supposed to destroy the middle class, leaving a tiny clique of oligarchs ruling over a vast proletariat. In fact, capitalism has enlarged the bourgeoisie wherever it has been practised.

Daniel Hannan, Daily Telegraph, 11 August 2012

Millennium Development Goals Report 2012

The report presents the yearly assessment of global progress towards the MDGs, highlighting several milestones – three important MDG targets have been met well ahead of the target date of 2015. The report says that meeting the remaining targets, while challenging, remain possible – but only if Governments do not waiver from their commitments made over a decade ago.

UN Department of Economic and Social Affairs, 2 July 2012

Rethinking Child Poverty

This short paper argues that the current measure of child poverty is inadequate. It fails to acknowledge that poverty is about much more than a lack of income

Centre for Social Justice, 12 May 2012

Poverty and Inequality

The themed section of this Review includes four papers that look, through different lenses, at the evolution of the UK income distribution – the components and dynamics of income over time.

National Institute Economic Review, 1 November 2011

3D Poverty

“Poverty and social exclusion mean much more than low income…”

Sonia Sodha and William Bradley, Demos, 2010

Uneven progress of UN Millennium Development Goals

The truth is that poverty has fallen, but progress has been uneven, and most of the goals are off-target to meet the deadline.

BBC News, 20 September 2010

Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Do we live in a top-shelf society?
Do we live in a top-shelf society?

Sunday 21 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Garden Room

Sexually explicit material has always challenged censors and traditional moralists. From the 1960s, liberal values on sex and sexual relationships became one of the markers of a civilised, modern society. Over the past decade, however, there’s a gnawing unease that sexually explicit material has gradually stepped down from the top shelf and into the mainstream. Whether it was Rihanna’s raunchy display on The X Factor, Jonathan Ross’ lewd chat shows or Katie Perry simulating oral sex in pop videos, pornographic imagery has become the wallpaper of twenty-first-century society. With the rise of the increasingly ubiquitous ‘celebrity sex tape’, fans of chart-friendly pop stars such as Tulisa Contostavlos are exposed to increasingly graphic and intimate depictions of their icons. And then there’s Fifty Shades of Grey.

Traditional moralists have always found much to censor in modern society, but when former champions of sexual liberalism, such as Joan Bakewell, start bemoaning the onslaught of naked flesh into the living room, something appears to have changed. Indeed, it is fortysomething ex-punk journalists turned parents who have started to wonder aloud why thong-thrusting pop videos are being shown at lunchtime.

But could it be argued that we’ve been here many times before? From Elvis Presley and David Bowie to Madonna and Prince, pop stars have sought to challenge and question society’s taboos around sex. Surely Rihanna and Perry are simply the latest practitioners of taboo busting exhibitionism? Or is it the case that sex and relationships have become devalued, with porn aesthetics the new low-grade currency? A civilised society should be open about sex, but are we in danger of forgetting that civilised values also means the separation of the public and private, the decent and the debased? Is the rush to smash sexual taboos a sign of healthy libertarianism or of self-loathing by a cultural elite unwilling and unable to promote higher culture? Are the sexual-taboo smashers really hammering elite traditionalists and conservatives or is it a radical way of sneering at ordinary people’s ‘small minded’ values?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Neil Davenport
sociology and politics teacher; writer on culture; former music journalist

Dr Jan Macvarish
associate lecturer and researcher, Centre for Parenting Culture Studies, University of Kent; author, Neuroparenting: The Expert Invasion of Family Life

Anna Percy
feminist performance poet; member, Stirred Feminist Poetry collective; organiser and facilitator, live poetry events and writing workshops

Chair:
Suzy Dean
freelance writer; blogger, Free Society

Produced by
Neil Davenport sociology and politics teacher; writer on culture; former music journalist
Suzy Dean freelance writer; blogger, Free Society
Recommended readings
Page Three Girls and porn-again feminists

It really is sad that so many feminists get their knickers in a twist about the Sun’s topless beauties.

Jennie Bristow, spiked, 22 November 2012

Should you really dress little girls in leopard-skin bikinis, Liz?

Actress accused of sexualising youngsters with bikini range

Chloe Thomas, Daily Mail, 16 September 2012

It’s not children who are sexualised … it’s us

Arguably what turns a seven-year-old into a sex object, far more than any crop-top or pair of sparkly hot pants, is the eye of the beholder. David Cameron has pledged to put a stop to “creepy” attempts to sell “sexy clothes” to young girls. But I find it more creepy that little girls’ bodies and how they dress has become the official object of government concern and public scrutiny.

Claire Fox, Herald, 26 June 2011

I’ve had enough of Katy Perry’s cleavage

David Cameron is right that our society is saturated with sexual imagery – but his proposals won’t solve the problem.

Neil Davenport, spiked, 9 June 2011

Nadine Dorries is right about child sexualisation. Why does this make people so angry?

The reason that she attracts such hostility, and receives so little back-up from quiet sympathisers, is that a non-judgmental approach to sex is part of a series of status-defining beliefs by which university-educated people identify themselves.

Ed West, Daily Telegraph, 6 June 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Epigenetics: are you what your parents ate?
Epigenetics: are you what your parents ate?

Sunday 21 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Frobisher Auditorium 2

‘Babies born into poverty are damaged forever before birth’, ‘Mother’s diet during pregnancy alters baby’s DNA’, ‘Pregnant 9/11 survivors transmitted trauma to their children’. These recent headlines may sound like fanciful pseudoscience, but all of them have their basis in a legitimate and increasingly prominent field of scientific study – epigenetics. Epigenetics deals with the fact that although our genes are replicated throughout most of the cells of our body, different genes are expressed in different parts of the body and at different times. Chemical changes can alter the effect of our DNA, without there needing to be any change to the sequence of the DNA itself. Such changes can occur in response to our circumstances, can endure within our lifetimes, and can even be inherited by our children and grandchildren. A simplistic way of summing this up (which fails to do justice to the subtleties involved) would be to say that contrary to what you were told at school, Lamarck was right – we can inherit acquired characteristics.

For campaigners who have long argued that early infant experience determines wellbeing in later life, and that we should therefore take great care in raising our children, this seems to be a vindication from science. It also suggests that even if we don’t care about our own health, we should realise our bad habits may be harming the next generation. Epigenetic studies have linked unhealthy diets and the effects of pollution to asthma, diabetes and obesity in our offspring. One recent article on the subject was titled: ‘We are what our mums ate.’

Nevertheless, critics – and even some of the key figures within epigenetics – take issue with these conclusions. Does epigenetics really provide scientific justification for what some see as a moralistic outlook on how we affect our children? Why has the field become so prominent now, a full 70 years after the term ‘epigenetics’ was first coined by the biologist CH Waddington? And does epigenetics finally break down the distinction between the natural and social sciences, or is it all the more important to disentangle the two?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “save link as”)

Speakers
John Gillott
researcher, Innogen, Open University; co-author, Science and the Retreat from Reason

Professor Marcus Pembrey
founder and chair, Progress Educational Trust

Marilyn Monk
emeritus professor of molecular embryology, University College London

Chair:
Sandy Starr
communications officer, Progress Educational Trust; webmaster, BioNews

Produced by
Sandy Starr communications officer, Progress Educational Trust; webmaster, BioNews
Recommended readings
Ministers urged to use epigenetic research when tackling public health problems

Significant improvements could be made to public health by building upon the findings of epigenetic research, according to a leading expert on epigenetics and child health.

Sandy Starr, BioNews, 18 September 2012

Misery index

Low social status is bad for your health. Biologists are starting to understand why

Economist, 15 April 2012

We are what our mums ate

With the help of old maternity notes, scientists have discovered that adult health is directly related to childhood nutrition

David Derbyshire, Guardian, 7 November 2011

Human Transgenerational Responses with Dr Marcus Pembrey

Dr. Marcus Pembrey provides a nice background on his experiences with imprinting and how it might provide a means for transgenerational adaptation.

epigenie, 10 September 2011

Why Your DNA Isn't Your Destiny

For decades, we have stumbled around massive Darwinian roadblocks. DNA, we thought, was an ironclad code that we and our children and their children had to live by. Now we can imagine a world in which we can tinker with DNA, bend it to our will. It will take geneticists and ethicists many years to work out all the implications, but be assured: the age of epigenetics has arrived.

John Cloud, Time, 7 January 2010

Grandfather made me what I am

The new study of epigenetics makes the old nature versus nurture argument irrelevant

Joanne Marlor, Daily Telegraph, 31 October 2007

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Organ donation: dead or alive?
Organ donation: dead or alive?

Sunday 21 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Frobisher Auditorium 2

The Greek philosopher Epicurus said ‘as far as death is concerned, we men live in a city without walls’. No doubt it comes as certainly as we pay taxes, but are we so sure what it actually is? Can we put our finger on that dividing line between life and non-life? Seeking moral certainty about the big question is more than philosophical idling. The ethics of organ transplantation are largely based on ‘brain death’ - the certainty that brain activity is irreversibly over - to allow harvesting of organs from the cadaver while the heart is still beating. But, apart from divergences of scientific opinion as to just what counts as an irreversible loss of consciousness, there is considerable debate about what the ability of the body to survive such a loss might mean for the ethics of organ transplantation. There are cases, after all, in which the brain may be dead but the body survives. Some pregnant women have been declared dead by neurological criteria yet sustained the pregnancy for several weeks. Are we confident in saying that these living bodies are dead? Confident enough to harvest unpaired vital organs from them? Even to presume consent for donation in these cases? And what about cases in which medical opinion is convinced that the brain is going to die but has not yet? Might it ever be ethical to take much-needed organs in such cases or would it conflict with the requirement that doctors act only to save or at least extend life? Might it amount to a disguised form of euthanasia?

Central to this issue of course is just what we mean by being human and how we value autonomy and free will. If the state presumes our consent with respect to organ donation might it simultaneously contribute to an under-valuing of our ability to make free choices and to act altruistically? Is it a way of avoiding the hard arguments necessary to convince potential donors? Might it even lead to stigmatising the choice to opt out? Much of our morality rests on a feeling that we should treat a human as an end, never as a means, certainly not as a bag of spare parts. Who is it that should pronounce on matters of life and death? Do we trust doctors enough to make the decision for us? Medical ethics boards? Public opinion? Philosophers, theologians, politicians? At just what point is it safe to say we can become a means for someone else’s ends? At what point does death intervene and you end being an end?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

 

Speakers
Dr Stuart Derbyshire
reader in psychology, University of Birmingham; associate editor, Psychosomatic Medicine and Pain

Steven Edwards
professor of philosophy of healthcare, Swansea University

Professor David Jones
director, Anscombe Bioethics Centre; co-editor, Chimera's Children: Ethical, Philosophical and Religious Perspectives on Human-Nonhuman Experimentation

Dr Sir Peter Simpson
chairman, UK Donation Ethics Committee

Hugh Whittall
director, Nuffield Council on Bioethics

Chair:
Helen Birtwistle
history and politics teacher, South London school

Produced by
Helen Birtwistle history and politics teacher, South London school
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Recommended readings
Human Bodies: donation for medicine and research

Debates Over Ethics.

Nuffield Council on Bioethics

The state’s skewed line on moral issues makes me worried about giving it automatic ownership of our bodies after death

Under presumed consent I am not confident the state would feel a duty to treat a corpse with reverence after death or use it solely to help others live

Francis Phillips, Catholic Herald, 8 October 2012

Fabrice Muamba was 'dead' for 78 minutes

Doctor reveals star needed 15 shocks to restart heart.

Alex West, Sun, 15 August 2012

Presumed consent: nationalising our organs

There is a desperate need for organs for transplant, but taking them from the dead without consent is no solution.

Tom Bailey, spiked, 7 August 2012

Vatican Radio tackles organ harvesting in light of questionable ‘brain death’ criterion

The controversy surrounding the questionable criterion of ‘brain death’ used to determine when life-support devices are turned off in preparation for organ harvesting was addressed in a May 8 interview with Dr. David Albert Jones on Vatican Radio.

Thaddeus Baklinski, LifeSiteNews, 9 May 2012

What and When Is Death?

All living things die. This is not new and it has nothing to do with technology. What is new in our technological age, however, is an uncertainty about when death has come for some human beings.

Alan Rubenstein, New Atlantis, 2009

Who’s afraid of xenotransplantation?

Using pig organs in humans could save thousands of lives. So why is Britain driving research away?

Stuart Derbyshire, spiked, 3 October 2008

Living people matter. When you're dead, you're dead

Brown's proposal on organ donation could end needless deaths that stem from the misguided instincts of the few

Polly Toynbee, Guardian, 15 January 2008

Organ Transplants (CTS explanations series)

This booklet outlines the main questions and concerns, explains Catholic teaching and systematically grapples with particularly difficult questions.

David Albert Jones, Catholic Truth Society, 2001


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Urban hubris and the great inequality debate
Urban hubris and the great inequality debate

Sunday 21 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Fountain Room

While tall buildings have always been the subject of some grumbling, London’s Shard, the tallest building in the European Union, has been particularly singled out internationally. For its critics, it embodies the ‘obscene wealth’ of the ‘arrogant’ City of London across the Thames. In a similar vein, one architecture critic described futuristic Canary Wharf as ‘the evil twin’ of the older financial sector, while the title of John Lanchester’s novel on the excesses of bankers, Capital, pointed to how the city itself acts as a microcosm of society’s perceived ills. For some, the Shard is itself a monument to ‘Londonism’: the idea of the capital as an elite city-state more interested in serving itself than the rest of the country. For others, suggestions that some London boroughs were planning to rehouse their poorest residents hundreds of miles away, while money poured into Olympic redevelopments such as Stratford City, perfectly highlighted the ‘social cleansing’ of the capital.

Nevertheless, it could be objected that the City has become a scapegoat for the lack of dynamism in the economy as a whole, and that, by acting as an international hub for global finance, developments like the Shard are more than contributing their fair share both to the nation as a whole and to local employment. The skyscraper cluster that is Canary Wharf might not be to everyone’s taste, but before its arrival, Docklands was so run down it was used to stand in for war-torn Vietnam in Stanley Kubrick’s Full Metal Jacket. Even now, a glance at the evolving skyline of rivals such as Dubai or Shanghai suggests the capital is far from the rich person’s plaything and planning free-for-all it is claimed to be.

Should the City of London be dethroned in favour of more even development throughout metropolitan London and in the towns and cities beyond, or is the City the guarantor of development in the regions? Are critics simply guilty of populist banker-bashing, or does London risk becoming better known as a sterile business hang-out rather than a living and breathing cosmopolitan city? Does it matter if tall buildings symbolise disparities of wealth, or does the development of cities, no matter how uneven, benefit all of us?

Listen to session audio:

 

Speakers
Martin Earnshaw
co-editor Future of Community: reports of a death greatly exaggerated; chair, IoI Social Policy Forum

Sunder Katwala
director, British Future; former general secretary, Fabian Society

Rob Killick
CEO, Clerkswell; author, The UK After The Recession

Anna Minton
writer and journalist; author, Ground Control: fear and happiness in the twenty-first century city

Chair:
Alastair Donald
associate director, Future Cities Project; architecture programme manager, British Council

Produced by
Martin Earnshaw co-editor Future of Community: reports of a death greatly exaggerated; chair, IoI Social Policy Forum
Recommended readings
Unreal Estate

On the eve of the Olympics, Justin McGuirk ponders the social and political consequences of London's white-hot real estate market and asks: what ever happened to the city that pioneered the modern ideal of social housing?

Justin McGuirk, domus, 30 July 2012

The city roars back

Waning for decades, England’s big cities are growing fast again

Economist, 21 July 2012

The Shard is the perfect metaphor for modern London

Expensive, off-limits and owned by foreign investors – the Shard extends the ways in which London is becoming more unequal

Aditya Chakrabortty, Guardian, 25 June 2012

High society

From London’s Shard to the Shanghai Tower, skyscrapers are shooting up – with apartments on their highest floors

Edwin Heathcote, Financial Times, 9 June 2012

The myth that Canary Wharf did east London any good

There are few places so utterly implicated in our discontents as this symbol of the ludicrousness of 'trickle-down' economics

Owen Hatherley, Guardian, 15 May 2012

Another country

London’s separateness from the rest of Britain becomes more pronounced every year

Neil O'Brien, Spectator, 14 April 2012

Statsblog: unequal cities are often some of the most economically successful

Cambridge has very low levels of inequality, but this may be a sign of poor planning policy not economic success

Paul Swinney, Guardian, 8 March 2012

Ground Control: Fear and happiness in the twenty-first-century city

Britain's streets have been transformed by the construction of new property - but it's owned by private corporations, designed for profit and watched over by CCTV. Have these gleaming business districts, mega malls and gated developments led to 'regeneration', or have they intensified social divisions and made us more fearful of each other?

Anna Minton, Penguin, 26 January 2012

The Shard is a broken society's towering achievement

London's new skyscraper is a monument to wealth and power run way out of control, a flashing warning sign of disease

Jonathan Jones, Guardian Comment is free, 19 August 2011

What’s wrong with towering ambition?

Burj Khalifa in Dubai, the tallest manmade structure in history, stands in glorious contrast to the pessimism of the West.

Karl Sharro, spiked, 8 January 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Stop the press: the media after Leveson
Stop the press: the media after Leveson

Sunday 21 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Pit Theatre

When education secretary and former journalist Michael Gove expressed concerns that the Leveson Inquiry might have a ‘chilling effect’ on free speech, Lord Leveson responded by insisting, ‘I do not need to be told about the importance of freedom of speech’. But given the powerful momentum behind the Leveson Inquiry, might we all benefit from asking what the lord justice’s judicial juggernaut means for the future of the free press?

The Inquiry began in the wake of phone-hacking allegations, setting its sights on culture, practices and ethics of the media in general. There has been no shortage of witnesses queuing up to express their disdain for the unethical way the media has operated. The Inquiry has provided quite a spectacle, with everyone from irate celebrities to cabinet ministers and ex-PMs, and of course the Murdoch family, appearing before the Lord Justice and his army of lawyers. The daily cross-examinations, readings of private emails and texts have become a surprise online hit show among the chattering classes. But is this anything beyond a show trial, an elitist attack on the ‘gutter press’? The Leveson Inquiry’s avowed aim is to reassure the public that the beasts of Fleet Street would be tamed. But is a tame press a healthy outcome? While in principle, everyone supports the idea of a free press, there seems to be a greater appetite for restraining renegade reporters. If we don’t tighten regulation of the press, people ask, what’s to stop it plumbing further depths? Whatever the faults of contemporary media culture, however, it is worth remembering that the modern media has its origins in the radical pamphlets and often scurrilous periodicals of the eighteenth century. While the authorities sought to censor them, the judgement of history is that a free press is worth having regardless of how venal it sometimes is. As Karl Marx said, you cannot have the rose without the thorn. Without total freedom of the press, are we jeopardising the role of the media as a check on politicians, institutions and businesses? Do we even have a free enough press as it stands?

Leveson’s critics are accused of creating straw men when they warn of state interference in the media, but isn’t the Leveson Inquiry itself a form of state interference? Leveson opened the inquiry saying its central question was, ‘who guards the guardians?’. But with the inquiry expanding into an interrogation of the entire British system of politics and government – and Leveson even suggesting Gove had no right to raise concerns until the inquiry had ruled - who can we expect to scrutinise unelected, unaccountable judges if the press is cowed?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Professor George Brock
head of journalism, City University London; author, Out of Print: newspapers, journalism and the business of news in the Digital Age

Mick Hume
editor-at-large, online magazine spiked; author, Trigger Warning: Is the Fear of Being Offensive Killing Free Speech?

Christina Patterson
writer, broadcaster and columnist

Raymond Snoddy
freelance journalist; former presenter, BBC NewsWatch; author, The Good, the Bad and the Ugly

Chair:
Patrick Hayes
director, British Educational Suppliers Association (BESA)

Produced by
Patrick Hayes director, British Educational Suppliers Association (BESA)
Recommended readings
The Leveson Inquiry: There’s a bargain to be struck over media freedom and regulation

n A balanced outcome from the inquiry could both strengthen the legal defences for good journalism done in the public interest and create incentives for regulation which does not rely on statutory backing. Both the law and regulation must make more use of an effective public interest test.

George Brock, The Foundation for Law, Justice and Society, 2012

The Leveson report will be good for freedom

Although regulation is the word widely used (often pejoratively), what it should mean here is the industry having due process, effectively applied standards and accountability, and effective redress, none of which is objectionable, and has been supported by virtually all the press insiders in their submissions to Leveson.

Peter Lloyd, Free Society, 26 September 2012

There is No Such Thing as a Free Press ...and we need one more than ever

Once the media reported the news. Now it makes it. The phone-hacking scandal and the Leveson Inquiry into the culture, practice and ethics of the media has put the UK press under scrutiny and on trial as never before.

Mick Hume, Imprint Acaademic, 1 September 2012

Leveson on the press:

Lord Justice Leveson's quest for balance between press freedom and censorship leaves only one task outstanding - the creation of a new regulatory body for the British press...

Raymond Snoddy, MediaTel, 18 July 2012

Summing up what we’ve learnt on Leveson, Murdoch and law

The fuss has died down as the inquiry has piled up a mountain of facts and opinions. Politicians have realised that the interest in the scandal outside the worlds of media and politics has faded.

George Brock, georgebrock.net, May 2012

Why we’re launching the Counter-Leveson Inquiry

Today, spiked launches the Counter-Leveson Inquiry, an intellectual two-fingered salute to the creeping conformism and censoriousness being unleashed by the Leveson process.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 29 February 2012

It's Not Just the Tabloid Press That's on Trial

There is a system for ensuring that people's phones aren't hacked. It's called the law. If the police who were meant to be upholding it had acted on the evidence they had, then quite a lot of this horrible, ugly, shameful exploitation of what ought to have been private grief, and, in Grant's case, private joy, wouldn't have happened.

Christina Patterson, Huffington Post, 23 November 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Free will: just an illusion?
Free will: just an illusion?

Sunday 21 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Cinema 1 Keynote Controversies

Free will is at the root of our notions of moral responsibility, choice and judgment. It is at the heart of our conception of the human individual as an autonomous end in himself. Nevertheless, free will is notoriously hard to pin down. Philosophers have denied its existence on the basis that we are determined by the laws of nature, society or history, insisting there is no evidence of free will in the iron chain of cause and effect. Theologians have argued everything happens according to the will of God, not man. And yet, when we decide we want something and act on that, it certainly seems as if we are choosing freely. Are we just kidding ourselves?

Some of the most profound contemporary challenges to the idea of free will come from neuroscientists, evolutionary psychologists and biologists. They argue we are effectively programmed to act in certain ways, and only feel as if we make choices. Some argue, for example, that we can easily be nudged into certain types of behaviour if only the right stimuli are applied. It is widely believed that advertising can make us buy things we don’t need or even want. Stronger forms of this reasoning can be found in the idea that early intervention, usually before the age of three, can determine the sort of adult a child will grow up to be. Without such intervention, we are told, their future will be determined by genetics, by their environment, by the way their parents treat them.

Nevertheless, common sense still gives strong support to the idea that we have free will. We understand there are relatively large areas of our lives in which it makes sense to say we could have acted differently, with correspondingly different results. The law recognises this too: it is no defence to say you stole because your parents were cruel to you. We feel remorse at opportunities we could have taken but did not. And we do sometimes choose to do the right thing even against our own interests: in extreme cases some even lay down their lives for others and for ideals. Jean-Paul Sartre argued, ‘the coward makes himself cowardly, the hero makes himself heroic; and that there is always a possibility for the coward to give up cowardice and for the hero to stop being a hero’. Is the idea that we might be born cowards, or heroes, an excuse for not facing up to our moral responsibilities? Or is free will really an illusion, the by-product of a vain belief that we are all special?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Joe Friggieri
professor of philosophy and former head of department, University of Malta; poet; playwright; theatre director; three-times winner, National Literary Prize

Dr Daniel Glaser
director, Science Gallery London, King's College London

Neal Lawson
chair, Compass; author, All Consuming; former adviser to Gordon Brown; co-editor, Progressive Century

Dr Ellie Lee
reader in social policy, University of Kent, Canterbury; director, Centre for Parenting Culture Studies

Chair: Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination

Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Recommended readings
Reducing gambling regulation will ruin more lives

MPs are wrong to suggest easing restrictions on an industry already causing massive damage to our communities

Rowenna Davis, Guardian, 24 July 2012

Ban outdoor advertising

We can choose the magazines we look at. But we've no freedom to walk down the street without facing the advertisers' assault

Neal Lawson, Guardian, 20 April 2012

The tyranny of parental determinism

The Lib-Con government is using junk neuroscience to claim that bad parenting causes all of society’s ills.

Ellie Lee, spiked, 24 August 2011

Neuroscience, free will and determinism: 'I'm just a machine'

Our bodies can be controlled by outside forces in the universe, discovers Tom Chivers. So where does that leave free will?

Tom Chivers, Daily Telegraph, 12 October 2010

All Consuming

Diamond-encrusted phones, waiting lists for handbags, 7-star hotels - in the summer of 2007, the UK economy finally reached its giddy peak. But it wasn't just celebrities and bankers wanting to spend, spend, spend. Whipping out our cheap credit cards, the whole nation developed one obsessive, unsustainable habit: shopping.

Neal Lawson, Penguin, 25 June 2009

Free will is not an illusion

The Enlightenment idea of conscious, freely acting individuals is worth defending against those who would reduce freedom to neuroscience

Raymond Tallis, spiked, 27 September 2007

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: US elections: the end of great expectations?
US elections: the end of great expectations?

Sunday 21 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Garden Room

In 2008, in the middle of an economic crisis, Barack Obama was elected Forty-Fourth President of the United States. He promised ‘hope and change’ and a new era of bipartisan government to rebuild the nation. Despite his lack of specificity with regard to policy, Obama’s biography as an African-American, church-going, family man, promising to unite both sides of the aisle, inspired millions of Americans to vote for him. Four years on, policies have stalled and, more fundamentally, there has been little progress to turn the economy around. Yet Obama faces the November presidential election as the default Democratic Party candidate. Many of his former liberal critics have reconciled themselves to the thought that he ‘is doing the best he can do’, while others are already suggesting suitable candidates for the 2016 race. Meanwhile, the question is whether the 2012 campaign will see an end to any hope of bipartisanship or even constructive political struggle, as America’s perennial ‘culture wars’ are reignited.

During primaries and caucuses across the US, the Republican Party appeared incapable of capitalising on Obama’s failures. The Tea Party was talked up by liberal commentators as well as sympathetic conservatives as a movement capable of revitalising the party base, and many Democrats felt their best hope was that the Republicans would nominate a right-wing culture warrior who would alienate independent voters. But in the end it was the unloved Mitt Romney who took the nomination. The Mormon millionaire is no liberal, but it is reckoned that he has the best chance of uniting the country behind the right rather than just playing to the party base. But with Obama’s endorsement of gay marriage coming after legislation requiring even Catholic hospitals and schools to include contraception in employee healthcare plans, might it be liberals going on the offensive this time? How have the culture wars moved on in the four years since Sarah Palin ran for VP?

Several other themes have been raised by prospective candidates and commentators: taxes, income inequality in the wake of the Occupy movement, racism (allegedly of the Republican Party’s white working-class base) and foreign policy (to bomb or not to bomb Iran) as well as the ability of candidates to empathise with ‘ordinary’ Americans. But neither of the candidates has yet shown themselves capable of engaging the American public in a discussion about the type of country we would like to live in. Can this election come to life and shape the future of the USA, or will it lead only to a further lowering of political expectations and greater cynicism about the political process.

Speakers
Brian M Carney
editorial page editor, Wall Street Journal Europe; co-author, Freedom, Inc; winner, Gerald Loeb Award business-journalism and Frederic Bastiat Prize for Journalism

Wendy Kaminer
US-based writer on law, liberty, feminism, religion, and popular culture; author, Worst Instincts: cowardice, conformity and the ACLU

James Matthews
management consultant; founding member, NY Salon; writer on economics and business

Gideon Rachman
chief foreign affairs commentator, Financial Times; author, Zero-sum World: politics, power and prosperity after the crash

Chair:
Jean Smith
specialist development consultant; co-founder and director, NY Salon

Produced by
Jean Smith specialist development consultant; co-founder and director, NY Salon
Recommended readings
Vice Presidential Debate

Vice President Joe Biden and Republican challenger Paul Ryan hit the campaign trail on Friday after a combative debate in which they challenged each other's facts and claims while offering starkly different visions for the direction the country should follow.

ABC, 13 October 2012

President Obama: The Democrats' Ronald Reagan

With his first term behind him, Obama is poised to be as significant a president as Reagan—tackling the deficit, spearheading immigration reform, and jolting the GOP back to sanity.

Andrew Sullivan, Daily Beast, 25 September 2012

The real losers in this election are the voters

Romney’s videotaped dismissal of swathes of the electorate will hurt him, but Obama remains a lame duck, too.

Sean Collins, spiked, 20 September 2012

US politics: a punch-up between mythmakers

It’s ‘the economy, stupid’, James Carville famously advised Bill Clinton’s presidential campaign in 1992, and 20 years later, in 2012, it’s ‘the economy, stupid’ once again. Given the unemployment crisis and a growing wealth gap, candidates would have to be stupid not to focus on the slow, unsteady recovery. I just wish they wouldn’t focus on it almost exclusively.

Wendy Kaminer, spiked, 10 September 2012

Romney calls Obama a 'disappointment' Stephanie Kirchgaessner, Financial Times, 31 August 2012

Obama’s Gotta Go

Why does Paul Ryan scare the president so much? Because Obama has broken his promises, and it’s clear that the GOP ticket’s path to prosperity is our only hope.

Niall Ferguson, Daily Beast, 20 August 2012

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Austerity: here to stay?
Austerity: here to stay?

Sunday 21 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Conservatory

The election of François Hollande as president of France at the same time as the Greek elections in May acted as a rallying call for many eager to reject the politics and economics of austerity, to which Europeans have been long told there is no alternative. Almost overnight ‘growth’, rather than austerity, seemed to be on everyone lips. Plan A for Austerity was ripped up, and Plan B was on. Although the subsequent elections in Greece returned a coalition headed by the pro-bailout New Democracy party, the anti-austerity Syriza seemed to gain the moral victory.

European burdens of debt, massive levels of youth unemployment, uncompetitive exports and low growth are real and demand stern and serious, grown-up answers. Should we be posing the question though in terms of either austerity or growth? Hard labour or holidays? Maybe it needs to get worse before it gets better. Austerity now, growth tomorrow? When William Hague said something so seemingly uncontentious and commonsense as ‘there’s only one growth strategy – hard work’, he roused little more than a chorus of businessmen protesting they were already flat out and the government should be doing more to help. But maybe we need to create the conditions for growth by working harder now, cutting out dead wood, being unsentimental about clapped-out industries? After all, real growth means more than just more government spending. It means producing more goods that can be sold at a profit. It means raising productivity through investment in technology, energy and infrastructure. It also often means a wrenching dislocation, even the end of the line, for workers made surplus to requirements. Have we the stomach for that?

Many of the rejections of austerity across Europe today seem to have something of a ‘stop-the-world-I-want-to-get-off’ character to them. A saying ‘no’ loudly more than saying ‘yes’ to something. After all, just what and where is Plan B? Dreams of sequestering Apple’s coffers to save the world aside, it is notable that Germany and France are committed to ridding themselves of nuclear power at a time when more cheap energy is just the kind of thing that could boost the economy. Hollande arrived at the Elyseés Palace in a sober part-electric car promising a ‘scrupulous sobriety of behaviour’, more teachers and higher taxes. Is that enough? Is it right to say that debt reduction should go hand in hand with economic growth? Is it irresponsible or just ambitious to argue that we should worry about growth first and (relatively smaller) debts later?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3  (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Dan Atkinson
economics editor, Mail on Sunday; co-author, Going South: why Britain will have a third world economy by 2014

Daniel Ben-Ami
journalist and author, Ferraris for All: in defence of economic progress and Cowardly Capitalism

Philippe Legrain
visiting senior fellow, LSE’s European Institute; author, Immigrants: your country needs them and European Spring: Why Our Economies and Politics are in a Mess – and How to Put Them Right

David Smith
economics editor, The Sunday Times; author, The Age of Instability

Chair:
Para Mullan
senior project manager, Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development; FCIPD

Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Para Mullan senior project manager, Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development; FCIPD
Recommended readings
Paul Krugman:

To save the single currency beset by difficulties that stem from its initial design, Economics Nobel Prize laureate Paul Krugman argues that Europe should set its sights on low inflation but forget about implementing uniform austerity measures.

Philippe Coste, presseurop, 6 September 2012

Public money spent on 'digging ditches' won't stimulate the economy

State spending to boost growth needs to go beyond mere investment – it must transform the economy.

Mariana Mazzucato, Observer, 2 September 2012

Greeks voting in anger cannot expect anything different from Syriza

If the leftwing coalition were to win Greece's election, it would still have to follow more or less the same policy as other parties

Paschos Mandravelis, Guardian, 15 June 2012

Going South: why Britain will have a third world economy by 2014

With a second recession looming, Britain is facing a moment of truth. This book examines how the leader of the industrial revolution came to exhibit the features of a 'developing country'; chronic debt, volatile growth and vulnerability to external events.

Larry Elliott and Dan Atkinson, Palgrave Macmillan, 14 June 2012

Even if he wins the election, Antonis Samaras will not be prime minister or leader of the

Gregory Farmakis ran for the first time in the 6 May elections with the ballot of Democratic Alliance. He will not run in the elections on 17 June, but along with at least 249 other rational thinkers, he created

Anastasia Balezdrova, GR Reporter, 13 June 2012

Sorry, but SYRIZA won’t save Europe

The radical Greek leftists, along with Hollande in France, pose as anti-austerity yet promote ideas which will condemn Europe to long-term penury.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 16 May 2012

Ferraris for All: In Defence of Economic Progress

The growth of the economy and the spread of prosperity are increasingly seen as problematic rather than positive - a trend Daniel Ben-Ami has termed 'growth scepticism'. Prosperity is accused of encouraging greed, damaging the environment, causing unhappiness and widening social inequalities. Ferraris for all is a rejoinder to the growth sceptics.

Daniel Ben-Ami, Policy Press, 14 March 2012

Greek sovereign debt crisis and Ecuador

The Greek drama has shown that every solution that is based in the compromise and the negotiations with the creditors and the international financial organisations leads to unemployment, poverty, neocolonial loan agreements, police brutality, constitutional coup d’etats and finally at default.

Leonidas Vatikiotis, contramee, 15 February 2012

Delivering growth while reducing deficits: lessons from the 1930s

In the Great Depression of the 1930s Britain grew strongly despite significant cuts in the government’s deficit, shortterm interest rates which were already as low as possible, and the international economy being in disarray. That is exactly what policymakers need to achieve today. This paper sets out what happened in the 1930s and what we can learn from that experience.

Nicholas Crafts, CentreForum, 2011

Aftershock: Reshaping the World Economy After the Crisis

The financial crisis brought the world to the brink of economic breakdown. Now bankers' bonuses are back, house prices are rising again and politicians promise recovery while unemployment rises, frictions with China grow and the planet overheats. Is this really sustainable?

Philippe Legrain, Little, Brown, 6 May 2010


Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with


Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Are exams a cheat?
Are exams a cheat?

Sunday 21 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Frobisher 4-6

Education secretary Michael Gove caused a storm in the summer by proposing to replace GCSEs with tougher exams more akin to the old O-levels. But exams had already been making headlines since Professor Les Ebdon was made access tsar for universities and put at the helm of the beefed-up Office for Fair Access. Ebdon’s support for the use of ‘contextual data in admissions’ means the type of school a university applicant attended, the funding and resources it received, and the range of courses offered all become important factors in assessing ‘academic potential’. Never mind what you have achieved in that grueling, three-hour exam; what could you achieve if given a fair chance? In that case, what’s the point of exams at all?

In fact, the whole system of examinations, once viewed as meritocratic and campaigned for by nineteenth-century workers’ organisations as a bulwark against privilege, has become tarnished. There is constant chatter of grade inflation, of dumbing down, excessive credentialism, and most recently, unfairness. Exam boards have been exposed as ‘corrupt’ by newspaper investigations into how they reveal their questions in advance to pressurised teachers and compete to offer the easiest papers. Critics point out that the boards are all private companies that benefit financially from setting the bar low to show how ‘successful’ their own exam is. Some state schools advised their pupils to take ‘easier’ GCSE-equivalent subjects to enhance their position in league tables. Meanwhile, private schools have turned to the IGCSE (comparable to the O-level) to give pupils ‘meatier fare to chew on’. As A-star grades proliferate, some suggest abolishing GCSEs, even A levels, altogether. Would Michael Gove’s recent proposals mean higher standards for all, or as some fear, simply a return to a two-tier system?

Do we really know what and why we examine today? One common complaint is that teaching for testing has replaced education. Pupils may be desperate to acquire ever more qualifications, but often as a means of gaining advantage in the employment market rather than as evidence of knowledge acquired. Critics of modern examinations and assessment argue continual testing misses the point about education as a holistic, humanist enterprise. Some even insist exams only test the useless bits of knowledge you never need again after you leave the exam hall anyway. And in an era that shies away from judgement and espouses self-esteem, exams that dare to fail or differentially grade people can seem anachronistic, elitist. With all this uncertainty, are exams still worth the paper they are written on, and if so, what point do they serve?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Dr Richard House
senior lecturer in education, University of Winchester; editor, Too Much, Too Soon? Early learning and the erosion of childhood; author, In, Against and Beyond Therapy

Tina Isaacs
senior lecturer, Institute of Education; formerly head, 14-19 Regulation, Office of Qualifications and Examinations Regulation (Ofqual)

Dr James Panton
head of politics, Magdalen College School, Oxford; associate lecturer in politics and philosophy, Open University; co-founder, Manifesto Club

Philip Walters
chair, Rising Stars (educational publisher), and the GL Education Group; Spurs season ticket holder; member of Middlesex County Cricket Club

Chair:
Dr Mark Taylor
vice principal, East London Science School; London convenor, IoI Education Forum

Produced by
Dr Mark Taylor vice principal, East London Science School; London convenor, IoI Education Forum
Recommended readings
Michael Gove goes Bacc to the future

The education secretary’s plan to restore rigorous teaching and end-of-course exams is a blast from the past worth welcoming.

Alka Sehgal Cuthbert, spiked, 4 October 2012

English GCSE: Senior exam board figure quits AQA

A senior exam board figure has resigned over the shifting of English GCSE grade boundaries which left thousands of pupils with lower grades than expected

Judith Burns, BBC News, 28 September 2012

Michael Gove is right to create a single exam board – but the changes need to go far deeper than tha

The simple truth is that our failing examination system does not need one operation to cure it of its ills, but several.

Martin Stephen, Daily Telegraph, 16 September 2012

GCSE wars: the case for real and hard exams

However exam grades are manipulated, the result is always to sacrifice children’s education at the altar of political expediency.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 28 August 2012

GCSE wars: the case for real and hard exams

However exam grades are manipulated, the result is always to sacrifice children’s education at the altar of political expediency.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 28 August 2012

The GCSE / O-level debate: Everyone’s a bloody expert

In all the kerfuffle over GCSEs and the potential return of O-levels, one question remains unanswered: why doesn’t everyone just ask me? After all, I’m the sodding expert.

Glosswatch, 22 June 2012

Child-Centered Learning Has Let My Pupils Down Matthew Hunter, Standpoint, June 2012

The debate over examinations is little more than a War of the Poses

Critics of tests and examinations - apparently forces of good in a heartless world - are everywhere.

Mark Taylor, Battles in Print, 20 November 2007

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Everyone a runner?
Everyone a runner?

Sunday 21 October, 9.30am until 10.15am, Fountain Room

Once considered the preserve of sadistic PE teachers and fitness fanatics, long-distance running now seems deeply fashionable. In recent years the likes of comedians John Bishop and Eddie Izzard have grabbed the headlines by taking part in high-profile, multiple marathon challenges. It is not a trend confined to celebrities either, with barely a day going by without a request from a friend to sponsor their charity run, and training schedules now a staple of dinner party conversation. It has even become a firm part of the cultural landscape: cult Japanese novelist Haruki Murakami dedicated a book to his passion for the subject, while revered dance act LCD Soundystem teamed up with iTunes and Nike to produce a song, 45:33, designed to perfectly sync with hipster joggers.

Yet while events such as the London Marathon and Great North Run continue to grow in size and stature, few recall the names of recent winners, with Haile Gebrselassie and Paula Radcliffe among the sport’s few household names. Modern running is a much-talked about subject, but one focused on individual achievements – obstacles overcome, money raised and personal bests beaten – with little concern for competition, winning races or medals. In schools, the cross-country run is a relic from a bygone era, lacking the inclusivity of team sports and presenting a bureaucratic nightmare for health-and-safety-conscious teachers.

Is the growing popularity of an activity which requires so many admirable virtues – dedication, concentration and self-improvement – a cause for celebration? Or does the highly individualistic and non-competitive character of today’s runners suggest this is merely jogging with a fashionable twist? Is doing the ‘sponsored fun run’ simply an extension of wearing a charity wristband to show off your caring side, or a noble attempt to demonstrate commitment to a cause? Are we all searching out the loneliness of the long-distance runner, or is it simply a more sociable alternative to the gym?

 

Speakers
Professor Richard Bailey
leading international authority on role of sport; research consultant for Nike, International Red Cross and previously International Olympic Committee

Alexandra Heminsley
writer; broadcaster; runner; author, Running Like a Girl (forthcoming)

Henry Rudd
senior manager, Investor Relations, SABMiller; charity runner

Dan Travis
director, Brighton Salon; tennis coach; author How to teach Young Children Tennis and In Defence of Competitive Sport.

Chair:
Hilary Salt
actuary; founder, First Actuarial

Produced by
Geoff Kidder director, membership and events, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Book Club; IoI’s resident expert in all sporting matters
Dan Travis director, Brighton Salon; tennis coach; author How to teach Young Children Tennis and In Defence of Competitive Sport.
Recommended readings
Run for my life!

Some 2,500 years after the jog that launched a million shin splints, marathoning has gone from heroic journey to commonplace event.

Mary Elizabeth Williams, Salon, 20 June 2012

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Illuminating the Middle Ages
Illuminating the Middle Ages

Sunday 21 October, 9.30am until 10.15am, Garden Room

Historically, our understanding of the Middle Ages has tended to be coloured by the ‘Dark Age’ label, which casts this as a time of cultural famine and stagnation in contrast to the Renaissance and our Classical heritage. Even the dates of the period – roughly between the end of the Roman Empire and the beginning of the early modern period – are obscure and disputed. Medieval studies are seen by many as irrelevant, and are under increasingly threat as a university discipline, while the undoubted appeal of a Dark Age-inspired drama like Game of Thrones has more to do with its exotic barbarism than any real insight into our history.

Yet medievalists insist the era has a wealth of thought, art and culture to rival that of any period in history, to such an extent that scholars now talk of the Carolingian, Ottonian and twelfth-century renaissances, emphasising the richness of an era once considered barren. Poetry from ‘The Wanderer’ to ‘Piers Plowman’, visual art, castles and cathedrals that still dominate the landscape, philosophy, religious and political writing, the foundations of modern science – all these are accessible to us. And there are signs that we are beginning to look more carefully at what is there. Thoughtful TV series on the Crusades and medieval manuscripts, the brilliant British Library exhibition of illuminated manuscripts from the royal collection, versions of Beowulf and Sir Gawain and the Green Knight by leading modern poets, all attest to a thirst to know more about what this period has to offer.

So what lies beyond King Arthur and the Round Table, and some bawdy poems by Chaucer? Is this a period that deserves to be better understood? Might medieval beliefs and attitudes to society, to mankind, to culture and literature offer insights into issues – from the relationship between church and state to the place of man in the universe – that still concern us today?

 

Speakers
Dr Elizabeth Boyle
research fellow, St Edmund's College; affiliated lecturer, department of Anglo-Saxon, Norse & Celtic, University of Cambridge

Albert Fenton
graduate, Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic, Trinity College, Cambridge; web copywriter

Lindsay Johns
writer and broadcaster; (non-residential) Fellow at the Hutchins Center for African & African-American Research at Harvard University

Dr Levi Roach
lecturer of Medieval History, University of Exeter

Chair:
Richard Swan
writer and academic

Produced by
Richard Swan writer and academic
Recommended readings
The ‘Dark Ages’ were a lot brighter than we give them credit for

We still view European history as taking off with the Renaissance and Enlightenment, but this position gets more out-of-date the more we learn

Richard Swan, Independent, 17 October 2012

The Anglo-Saxons are coming!

Over the last six months I have come to see that the Anglo-Saxons were more subtle, more sophisticated, more human and more important in terms of our everyday lives today than I had ever imagined.

Graeme Kay, BBC Radio 3, 11 October 2012

Five Contributions of the Middle Ages

You can study a past civilization like an anthropologist observes the people of some South Sea Island, or you could simply relax and appreciate the way they did things, enjoy their art and architecture, literature and music, and peraps try to understand how their society worked and how they looked at the world.

Lynn Harry Nelson, Virtual Library

Closing the Book on Celtic

Growing nationalism in the UK’s constituent countries threatens the study of Celtic languages and history

Elizabeth Boyle, History Today, 1 August 2012

Is it time to get Anglo-Saxon about England's local government?

The government wants a new era of localism and civic engagement. But rather than thinking up new ideas, should they be looking back into England's distant past for inspiration?

Justin Parkinson, BBC News, 26 April 2012

Red and blue heavens

For those who already love medieval manuscripts the exhibition is unmissable. For those who don’t (yet), there is a wealth of treasures and surprises that constantly make you recalibrate your assumptions and understanding

Richard Swan, Culture Wars, 5 January 2012

The Carolingian Renaissance

Melvyn Bragg and guests discuss the Holy Roman Emperor Charlemagne and the Carolingian Renaissance.

In Our Time, BBC Radio 4, 30 March 2006

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: The poppy: to wear or not to wear?
The poppy: to wear or not to wear?

Sunday 21 October, 9.30am until 10.15am, Conservatory

Many people wear Remembrance Day poppies as a sign of respect for British soldiers who died in the two World Wars. More recently, the Royal British Legion, which sells the poppies to raise money, has highlighted the cause of soldiers killed and injured in the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq. For some, wearing the poppy is like wearing an AIDS ribbon or a Make Poverty History wristband; all are generally understood as non-political expressions of compassion. Yet every year the period for wearing poppies seems to grow longer, and those who refuse to wear one, like broadcaster Jon Snow, are frowned upon. Celtic supporters who unfurled a banner in opposition to the poppy at a football match in 2010 were roundly condemned and demonised.

Is it time to subject this apparently ‘non-political symbol’ to some political scrutiny? Those Celtic supporters saw themselves in a tradition of anti-imperialism, challenging a celebration of British military power. And radical Islamists have even burned poppies as a show of opposition to what they see as anti-Muslim wars in Afghanistan and Iraq. In the past, many pacifists also objected to what they saw as the glorification of war, and wore white poppies instead as a symbol of peace. So in seeing the poppy as non-political, are we in danger of historical amnesia, even whitewashing Britain’s sometimes barbaric imperial past? Or should we deliberately put Remembrance beyond politics, distinguishing between the soldiers who risk their lives and the politicians who command them? Are those who object to the poppy as a symbol of imperialism as stuck in the past as those who celebrate it as such?

Why do we remember the war dead, and would it be such a bad thing if we forgot? In recent years, some have called for those who refuse to observe Remembrance or minute’s silences to be banned from football matches, or even jailed. Is their intransigent attitude an intolerable insult to the British military dead and those who remember them? Or should we insist on the right not to conform and go along with public rituals, for political, ethical or any other reasons? Is the expectation that we all wear the poppy a valuable expression of social cohesion, or an ugly form of moral blackmail?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
David Cox
children's writer; actor; screenwriter; close protection specialist; martial artist and cage fighter

Ruth Dudley Edwards
historian and journalist; author, The Seven: the lives and legacies of the founding fathers of the Irish Republic (forthcoming)

Ted Harrison
artist, "Innocence Betrayed", St Paul's 2011 Remembrance Day piece; author, Remembrance Today; poppies, grief and heroism

Chair:
Kevin Rooney
politics teacher and head of social science, Queen's School, Bushey; co-author, Who's Afraid Of The Easter Rising?

Produced by
Kevin Rooney politics teacher and head of social science, Queen's School, Bushey; co-author, Who's Afraid Of The Easter Rising?

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Baby culture vultures
Baby culture vultures

Sunday 21 October, 9.30am until 10.15am, Frobisher 4-6

The coalition government said earlier this year that no one could call themselves educated unless they’d had culture and art running through their education. This surely struck a chord with many teachers, parents, artists and musicians, who have long worried arts subjects have become marginalised in schools. Understandably, then, many welcomed the government’s announcement of a new £15million investment, following the recommendations of Darren Henley’s review of cultural education. But on closer inspection, the government’s strategy has less to do with investing in the arts as school subjects than making visits to museums and trips to art blockbusters part of school life. The investment also establishes a new ‘Cultural Education partnership group’ alongside funding for film academies, art and design ‘Saturday clubs’, youth dance, ‘heritage’ schools, and museum and gallery education.

But are we sure of what makes for a good ‘cultural education’? Why are cultural institutions, rather than teachers, being given the responsibility for developing cultural education programmes for schools? After all, culture includes everything from theatre, art, literature and dance to digital media, and increasingly young people’s ‘own’ culture – from rap to street dance – is given pride of place. Rearing a new generation of voracious culture vultures is not the same as giving children a solid grounding in art and music – teaching them to draw, for example, or how to read music. So might not the traditional subjects of music, art, literature and history be the best vehicle for educating children in the canon, aesthetics and the skills of artistic appreciation? Is a visit to the British Museum a substitute for a history lesson or merely an add-on? And is cultural education more about socialising the young to become the new audiences arts institutions desperately crave to prove their relevance, rather than a good-faith attempt at creating a new generation of art lovers?

Speakers
Dr Wendy Earle
impact development officer, Birkbeck, University of London; convenor, Academy of Ideas Arts and Society Forum

Sean Gregory
director, Creative Learning, Barbican/Guildhall School of Music & Drama

Piers Hellawell
composer; professor of composition, Queen's University Belfast

Chair:
Dr Tiffany Jenkins
writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there

Produced by
Dr Wendy Earle impact development officer, Birkbeck, University of London; convenor, Academy of Ideas Arts and Society Forum
Dr Tiffany Jenkins writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there
Recommended readings
Classical CD for newborns to inspire a love of music

Every newborn baby in Scotland will receive a classical CD to inspire a love of music.

BBC News, 11 October 2012

Cultural Education in England

An independent review by Darren Henley for the Department for Culture, Media and Sport and the Department for Education

Darren Henley, Department for Culture, Media and Sport, 2012

Henley review of cultural education backs arts in the national curriculum

Government responds positively to Henley review and pledges money for national film and dance academies

Lizzie Crump, Guardian, 29 February 2012

The Arts and the Creation of Mind

Learning in and through the arts can develop complex and subtle aspects of the mind, argues Elliot Eisner in this engrossing book. Offering a rich array of examples, he describes different approaches to the teaching of the arts and shows how these refine forms of thinking that are valuable in dealing with our daily life

Elliot W. Eisner, Yale University Press, 22 October 2004

Cultural Learning Alliance

The Cultural Learning Alliance is a collective voice working to ensure that all children and young people have meaningful access to culture in this difficult economic climate



Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Media-bashing live
Media-bashing live

Sunday 21 October, 9.30am until 10.15am, Pit Theatre

‘Never argue with a man who buys ink by the barrel’, runs a famous warning. Yet, if all the charges submitted to the Leveson Inquiry are to be believed, maybe the media need to buy more ink. They stand accused of being Public Enemy Number One: Of making prime ministers bow to the might of press barons; of dumbing us down through a diet of celebrity gossip and the latest moral panic; and of misinforming us on everything from governmental policy and scientific evidence through to teen delinquency, immigration and the difference between paedophiles and paediatricians. Whatever your political inclination, what used to be tomorrow’s fish-and-chip paper is today’s boiler-plate excuse: Don’t blame me, it was the media wot done it!

Yet there are undoubtedly heroic hacks among the villainous press pack. It was, after all, Guardian journalist Nick Davies who broke the ‘Hackgate’ story with good old-fashioned investigative reporting, while Johann Hari discovered that fellow journalists can be ruthless in challenging others’ misconduct. Free speech campaigners point to the bravery of persecuted journalists the world over in exposing censorious regimes and counter that, with the rise of super-injunction on top of the UK’s notoriously stringent libel laws, the media must still be bloodying some of the right noses. Meanwhile, in the face of drastic cuts across the sector and the difficulties of finding support for serious investigative journalism, newshounds and opinion-formers can equally plead desperate poverty as much as a supposed malign power.

Was colourful Queens’ Counsel Robert Jay correct when he announced that putting the media under legal scrutiny was ‘so much fun’? Is it really possible, as Hugh Grant urged, to separate off the ‘goodies’ from the ‘baddies’ of the tabloid beast? Faced with evidence of their crimes from Hillsborough to Hackgate, isn’t it time the press were made to eat their words? Join our panel of plucky hacks as they take the brickbats, and maybe the occasional plaudits, of Media-Bashing Live!

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Sean Bell
secretary and founder member, The Brighton Salon; copy-editor, writer and journalist

Nirpal Singh Dhaliwal
freelance journalist; former sex-advice columnist, Evening Standard; author, Tourism

Ed Dorrell
features and comment editor, Times Educational Supplement

Jo Phillips
award-winning journalist; former press secretary to Paddy Ashdown; co-author, Why Vote?

Jason Walsh
journalist; foreign correspondent, CS Monitor

Chair:
David Bowden
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer

Produced by
David Bowden associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Born this way?
Born this way?

Sunday 21 October, 9.30am until 10.15am, Frobisher Auditorium 2

When former Sex and the City star Cynthia Nixon suggested in an interview that she had chosen to be a lesbian, it generated an outcry from many gay-rights campaigners. For many, the idea that being gay is not a choice is key to the fight for equal rights. Instances of homosexual behaviour in animals are used as evidence of the naturalness of being gay. Differences in brain structure between gays and straights are employed to further reinforce the idea that sexuality is innate. While evidence of a gay gene is highly contested, Mayor Boris Johnson’s decision to ban adverts for gay-conversion therapy on London buses seemed to confirm a mainstream view that it was unacceptable to treat sexuality as a lifestyle choice which could be altered.

Yet early gay-rights activists used to rail against the idea of homosexuality being a sickness in need of a cure, precisely on the basis that it was a choice made by rational adults in a free society.  In this view, radical campaigners’ claim that some are simply ‘born this way’ is an equally conservative argument, expressing a hostility towards experimentation and a narrow view of human relationships. Many have scoffed at Chris Birch’s claims in a BBC documentary I Woke Up Gay that a stroke turned him from engaged rugby player to flamboyant gay hairdresser, but Nixon’s self-proclaimed ‘choice’ to make a similar change provoked equal amounts of discomfort. An ever-growing list of possible sexualities seems to render the more popularly-understood category of ‘LGBT’ increasingly archaic, with debates over transgenderism and transsexuality often blurring the lines and confusing the mainstream discussion over what is natural and what is chosen.

So what happened to the idea of choice in sexuality? Can gay rights only be secure if homosexuality is proven to be innate? Is ‘Born This Way’ simply a modern spin on the old slogan ‘I Am What I Am’, or does it contradict the libertarian idea of self-creation? Can sexuality be found in the brain, or do we have to look beyond our heads for the answer?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “save link as”)

Speakers
Dr Ceri Parsons
senior lecturer in psychology, Staffordshire University; research interests include gender identity and sexuality

Dr Qazi Rahman
lecturer in psychological sciences and director of Psychology Programmes, Queen Mary University; co-director, Centre for Mind in Society; co-author, Born Gay

Wes Streeting
head of education, Stonewall; former president, NUS

Chair:
Craig Fairnington
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; university finance and accommodation officer

Produced by
Craig Fairnington associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; university finance and accommodation officer
Recommended readings
The Paradox of Gay Genes

One of the commonest questions I get is this: If being gay is genetic, and gay sex doesn't produce children, why don't those genes die out?

Simon LeVay, Huffington Post, 1 October 2012

Why Cynthia's Choice Matters

Gay rights activists have denounced the Sex and the City star's

Craig Fairnington, DIVA, 25 January 2012

The Lady Gaga school of gender delusion

Cordelia Fine’s new book skewers the trendy idea that men and women act differently because we are ‘born that way’.

Derbyshire and Powell, spiked review of books, 3 October 2011

Beyond gay and straight

After 40 years of gains on homophobic law repeal, is there any more need for a separate identity?

Peter Tatchell, Guardian, 2 July 2010

Gay by nature

What causes homosexuality? Can sexual orientation be changed? And are the brains of gay people different from those of straight people

Adrian Tippetts, PinkNews, 1 December 2009

Born gay or made gay?

New research claiming gayness is biologically determined does not add up. Something as complex as human sexual life is bound to evolve from a multiplicity of factors.

Peter Tatchell, Guardian, 28 June 2006

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Battle of Ideas Urban Jog
Battle of Ideas Urban Jog

Sunday 21 October, 8.00am until 9.00am, Barbican, Silk Street entrance

Urban Jogs arrives at the Barbican and the Battle of Ideas!  Come and join a jog tour of the Barbican’s urban hinterland with runner and personal trainer Ade Aboaba and urbanist Michael Owens.

Starting and ending at the Barbican Centre, the 6.4 kilometre (4 mile) jog tour will combine a story of the Barbican’s development, and the areas nearby, with a decent cardiovascular workout.

It will be an energising start to your day, so if you’re comfortable running 11 minute miles then please come and join us! Including stops, stretches and exercises on route, the jog will last an hour.

Cost: Free. To book, or for more info, please email ade@ade-aboaba.com


Produced by
Ade Aboaba personal trainer, leader, Urban Jog
Michael Owens commercial director, Bow Arts Trust; owner, London Urban Visits; formerly, head of development policy, London Development Agency

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Pop-up communities: here to stay?
Pop-up communities: here to stay?

Saturday 20 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Frobisher Auditorium 2

The UK riots of last summer had a certain unreality about them. They took the nation by horrible surprise as youths trashed their own neighbourhoods, reviving talk of a ‘broken society’. Yet in their immediate aftermath, as the ‘clean-up’ campaigns got to work, our faith in the future of community was apparently restored. ‘Pop-up’ groups of residents appeared unprompted on the streets almost before the smoke had cleared, armed with brooms to clean up the mess (although they went their separate ways almost as quickly as the rioters). Even if we don’t know our neighbours, we can at least do a bit of neighbourhood networking with a view to ‘shoring up community resilience’, said one organiser of the clean-up. But surely we need something more than this if communities are to deal with or even prevent the kind of breakdown witnessed in London, Birmingham and Manchester last summer? So is the much-derided Big Society a match for the problems highlighted by the riots?

Communities secretary Eric Pickles affirmed the government’s desire to shift from a ‘Whitehall-dictated’ approach to one of putting ‘neighbourhoods in control’. Matthew Taylor, chief executive of the RSA, wants to see citizens who are ‘more engaged, and more self-reliant’. But like most advocates of such a shift, Taylor believes it is up to the state to foster this new, engaged and active citizen. One RSA programme, working with a local authority, is seeking to modify people’s behaviour, making them less anti-social and drug-dependent, and encouraging them to recycle and grow their own vegetables. But even if we reject such a top-down approach, do the riots suggest the Big Society has to mean more than just letting us get on with it? Tottenham MP David Lammy caused something of a stir by suggesting government interference in how parents raise their children had been a factor in the riots: people ‘no longer feel sovereign in their own homes’, he complained. How do we make a reality of the notion of autonomous individuals taking control of their communities, when even their ability to take care of their own families is in question? How do we build a sense of community that lasts longer than it took for the riots to happen and for the shell-shocked residents to put away their brooms?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Tessy Britton
director, Social Spaces; editor, Hand Made: portraits of emergent new community culture

Dave Clements
adviser to local government; blogger, Guardian, Huffington Post; convenor, IoI Social Policy Forum.

Hugh Flouch
founder, Networked Neighbourhoods

Caroline Macfarland
managing director, ResPublica Trust; co-author, Clubbing Together: The hidden wealth of communities

Chair:
Dr Simon Knight
senior youth work practitioner; vice chair, Play Scotland

Produced by
Dave Clements adviser to local government; blogger, Guardian, Huffington Post; convenor, IoI Social Policy Forum.
Recommended readings
Riot-hit communities need more than this lazy policy

Too often government tries to

Dave Clements, Independent Voices, 30 September 2012

Bringing big ideas to life

Pop-ups events are becoming a very important part of our work. The reason is that bringing things to life in a visible tangible form is a very exciting thing to do.

Collaborate, 30 August 2012

The Demise of Working Men’s Clubs

Do Working Men’s Clubs hold their own key to survival, asks Ruth Cherrington

Ruth Cherrington, ResPublica, 17 August 2012

The role of social media in community building and development

Despite the increasing importance of social networks, community development needs to take place both on and offline

Rosie Niven, Guardian, 8 December 2011

Society falling apart? Blame it on The Gang!

Gang culture’ is almost entirely the imaginary creation of a political elite which prefers to fantasise that urban implosion is a product of gang conspiracies, rather than face up to the harsh reality that the riots were triggered by the twin crises of community solidarity and state authority.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 23 August 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Genocide denial: should we defend the right to speak evil?
Genocide denial: should we defend the right to speak evil?

Saturday 20 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Frobisher 4-6

In January 2012, the French Senate voted for a bill with cross-party support to make it a criminal offence to deny the mass murder of Armenians in 1915 was genocide. Anyone who ‘outrageously’ questions the official version of events would face a one-year prison sentence. The French Constitutional Court quashed the bill, saying it represented an ‘unconstitutional attack on freedom of expression’. Nonetheless, the European Framework decision on Racism and Xenophobia says genocide denial or gross trivialisation should be a crime in all EU member states. As well as France, a number of member states have rejected this, including the UK, the Netherlands, Italy, Denmark, Sweden and Spain. Their rejection reflects an ongoing dispute about whether historical truths should be treated as legal truths. It also reflects a degree of commitment to freedom of expression, which must include the right to shock, offend and outrage

Concern over the problem of genocide denial can seem out of proportion to its reality. When deniers do pop up, they are easily exposed and seem to have little to no influence on society. David Irving is more of a laughing stock than a new leader of anti-Semitism in Europe. But some warn against what they see as a naively overconfident assessment of our liberal democracies. They insist we need to back up our commitment to liberal values with legal sanctions for those who seek to undermine them.

Is genocide denial a limit beyond which free speech must not go? What does it really mean to say that certain facts are so true that they cannot be denied? After all, flat-Earthers don’t face jail sentences. Or is it not so much a matter of the truth of the facts themselves but of a greater moral truth represented by genocide, by the Holocaust? It has been argued that it is only through unqualified free speech that we have any hope of reaching the truth. Does this not apply to genocide denial; has humanity already established the truth about that? Are we so sure of that as to allow lawyers to prosecute in the name of that truth?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Dr Jean-Marc Dreyfus
reader in history and Holocaust studies, University of Manchester

Timothy Garton Ash
professor of European studies, University of Oxford; commentator; director, Free Speech Debate

Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination

Brian Winston
Lincoln Professor, University of Lincoln; author, A Right to Offend: free expression in the twenty-first century

Chair:
Professor Dennis Hayes
professor of education, University of Derby

Produced by
Professor Dennis Hayes professor of education, University of Derby
Recommended readings
Britain needs more free speech. Change this law now

To make this country's free speech laws clear, liberal and consistent, we should not only remove the word

Timothy Garton Ash, Guardian, 6 June 2012

See No Evil

How did genocide denial become a doctrine of the internationalist left?

George Monbiot, monbiot.com, 22 May 2012

Turkey hails French court overturning Armenian genocide denial law

The Turkish government applauded France's highest court reversing a law making it illegal to deny Armenian deaths in the former Ottoman Empire over 100 years ago was genocide.

Christian Science Monitor, 28 February 2012

Rwanda journalists jailed for genocide denial launch supreme court appeal

Agnès Uwimana and Saïdati Mukakibibi are being supported by an international team of lawyers and human rights groups

Owen Bowcott, Guardian, 29 January 2012

Writing the Holocaust

Holocaust studies is at a paradox: while historians of the Holocaust defend it as a legitimate and well-defined area of research, they write against a complex political and ideological background that undermines any claim for it as a normative field of historical study. Writing the Holocaust offers a lucid enquiry into this complex field by demonstrating the impact of current theories from the humanities and social sciences upon the treatment of Holocaust studies.

Jean-Marc Dreyfuss & Daniel Langton, Bloomsbury Academic, 28 May 2010

What is the point of evil?

If Terry Eagleton is right that evil is literally, supremely pointless, and also reassuringly rare in a world full of human purpose, then why are we discovering it everywhere we look?

Angus Kennedy, spiked, 26 March 2010

Decriminalize Holocaust Denial

This is the moment for Europe to dismantle taboos, not erect them

Timothy Garton Ash, Guardian, 21 October 2006

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Europe's new far right, fear or fantasy?
Europe's new far right, fear or fantasy?

Saturday 20 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Pit Theatre

Many have started to sound alarm bells about the rise of right-wing parties across Europe. In addition to the right’s victories in Hungary’s national elections last year, groups from Golden Dawn in Greece to Marine Le Pen’s National Front in France have been making electoral gains, while street groups like the English Defence League have generated many headlines. Deputy prime minister Nick Clegg has not been alone in warning of ‘a whole range of nationalist, xenophobic and extreme movements increasing across the European Union’. There is widespread concern in political and media circles that a ‘decontaminated’ breed of far-right groups are starting to gain acceptance and a purchase among the European public, who are attracted by their ‘populist’ policies. As Corrado Passero, Italy’s minister of economic development, declared earlier this year, ‘Our worst enemy right now is populism’.

Yet while some fearfully quote Yeats’ warning that ‘the centre cannot hold’, others query whether, taken together, such groups express much coherence as a far-right ‘movement.’ In an attempt to account for the initial collapse of the centre-left in the aftermath of the financial crisis, some argue that right-wing parties are merely riding a surge of popular hostility to technocratic austerity measures rather than gaining a genuine political foothold. In France, for example, Sarkozy’s opportunistic co-opting of Le Pen’s rhetoric could not swing the election in his favour; while the EDL do not even have the BNP’s one-time political prominence. Yet the heated debate generated by lone outrages, such as that of Anders Breivik and Toulouse gunman Mohamed Merah, are tragic reminders that tensions over immigration and identity are common across Europe.

Is there such a thing as a ‘new European far-right’ or is there a greater danger of scaremongering and exaggeration? Are fears over the rise of the right a product of reading the present in terms of past reactions to economic crises? Is it the case that democracy – even with unsavoury elements involved – is worth defending over a supposedly enlightened, unelected technocracy? How does today’s brand of populism differ from older popular political movements? Is there a genuine threat in unstable times that fringe populism could go mainstream?

Speakers
Jamie Bartlett
director, Centre for the Analysis of Social Media, Demos; author, The New Face of Digital Populism; co-author, #Intelligence

Dr Thierry Baudet
teacher, Leiden Law School; former columnist, NRC Handelsblad; author, The Significance of Borders: why representative government and the rule of law require nation states

Matthew Goodwin
associate professor in politics, University of Nottingham; author, New British Fascism: rise of the British National Party

Bruno Waterfield
Brussels correspondent, The Times; co-author, No Means No

Chair:
Patrick Hayes
director, British Educational Suppliers Association (BESA)

Produced by
Patrick Hayes director, British Educational Suppliers Association (BESA)
Recommended readings
The far right is fragmenting

The BNP is in freefall but there is potential for one of its many rivals to move into the space it vacates

Matthew Goodwin, Guardian, 19 September 2012

Far-right ideas: Britains's generation gap

Our research shows that anti-immigrant, anti-Muslim policies are much less likely to appeal to young people

Matthew Goodwin, Guardian, 16 September 2012

Culture matters more

The far right in Europe is rising in many European countries in spite of its inability to provide a coherent economic message

Economist, 11 August 2012

Beware the rise of EU anti-populists

The EU elites’ fear of an imminent Fourth Reich reveals a great deal about their loathing of the European mob.

Patrick Hayes, spiked, 28 May 2012

The New Face of Digital Populism

This is the first quantitative investigation into these digital populists, based on over 10,000 survey responses from 12 countries. It includes data on who they are, what they think and what motivates them to shift from virtual to real-world activism. It also provides new insight into how populism — and politics and political engagement more generally — is changing as a result of social media.

Jamie Bartlett, Jonathan Birdwell, Mark Littler, Demos, 7 November 2011

Inside the EDL

Populist politics in a digital age

Jamie Bartlett, Demos, 28 October 2011

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Who is the greatest artist? Balloon debate
Who is the greatest artist? Balloon debate

Saturday 20 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Fountain Room

While the London Olympics has understandably dominated the capital’s cultural agenda, 2012 has also been another booming year for art lovers. Major exhibitions of Leonardo da Vinci, JMW Turner, Pablo Picasso, Lucian Freud, David Hockney and Damien Hirst have seen audiences flock to the capital’s galleries to enjoy some of the most important artists through the ages. The international arts trade continues to be robust against the backdrop of the global financial instability, although few would feel the $250million paid for ‘The Card Players’ in 2011 offers much of a guide to where Paul Cezanne truly stands in the pantheon of great artists.

Yet beyond the household names who can pack out blockbuster shows, debates around contemporary art reveal general confusion over what art is and how it is judged. The late Thomas Kinkade, who was one of America’s most popular and commercially successful painters, is barely known outside of his own country. In the UK, Jack Vettriano has become an eye-roll-inducing byword for middlebrow commercial tastes, while the conceptual art of YBAs such as Hirst and the annual populist hostility to the Turner Prize seems to confirm public bewilderment over artistic value.

Who, then, can lay claim to the title of world’s greatest artist? Polymath visionaries such as Leonardo or Blake, or would we be better focusing on a Rodin or van Gogh who came to define one medium or style? Did Duchamp or Warhol successfully overturn our conception of what had come before? Or Kandinsky or Picasso who made us look at the world afresh? Could Hirst’s fascination with mortality qualify him for immortality? Or should we drop the obsession with personality and, in the style of Grayson Perry, start singing the praises of the unknown craftsman?

Artists being represented by our balloonists include:

-Louise Bourgeois (1911-2010)
-Michelangelo Merisi da Caravaggio (1571-1610)
- David Hockney (1937-)
-The Rohan Master (c.1410-1440)
-William Morris (1834-1896)
-Pablo Picasso (1881-1973)
-Mark Rothko (1903-1970)

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Jan Bowman
author and illustrator; author, This is Birmingham

Sara Radstone
artist; tutor, HE Diploma in Fine and Applied Arts (Ceramics), The City Lit, London

Emma Ridgway
curator, creative learning, Barbican Centre

Sarah Strang
founder, CIVIC ROOM

Richard Stubbs
educational consultant; former teacher; advocate, Greenwich Advocacy

Richard Swan
writer and academic

Jason Walsh
journalist; foreign correspondent, CS Monitor

Chair:
David Bowden
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer

Produced by
David Bowden associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer
Richard Stubbs educational consultant; former teacher; advocate, Greenwich Advocacy
Recommended readings
Damien Hirst and the great art market heist

Hirst is the world's richest artist and the Tate's big retrospective will mark the zenith of his power. But when his stock falls, how will an art world in thrall to big money respond?

Hari Kunzru, Guardian, 16 March 2012

David Hockney rebuffs 'greatest living artist' title

David Hockney has rebuffed claims that he is Britain's greatest living artist, calling the description

David Hockney, BBC News, 13 January 2012

The Art Market Shouldn't be the Judge of Good Art

Art is a lifelong learning curve and the market is no substitute for putting eyeballs directly on it—smelling it, tasting it and touching it. You need to lift it, hang it, insure it, frame it, pack it, ship it, live with it, damage it, hate it and idolize it.

Kenny Schachter, Rise Art, 24 October 2011

What is art? A debate for our times

In response to Richard Eyre's essay in our Arts & Books magazine last week, other cultural figures – and readers – reflect on the true meaning of art

Independent, 19 November 2009

How do you judge art?

If I write a five-star review of an artist's work, while another critic finds it worthy of only one star - who is right?

Jonathan Jones, Guardian, 9 October 2001

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Debating Matters Competition International Final
Debating Matters Competition International Final

Saturday 20 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Frobisher Auditorium 1

The Battle of Ideas will host the fourth UK versus India Debating Matters Championship, a showdown between the winners of Debating Matters Competition UK 2011/12 and the winners of the Debating Matters India Competition 2011. Known for its rigorous and intellectually challenging format that values substance over style, the Debating Matters international final will showcase the very best debaters from both countries. Students from Our Lady Queen of the Mission School, Kolkata, India and Graveney School, London, UK, will debate the motion Clinical Trials in developing countries are exploitative.

Until 1995, clinical trials were mainly conducted in the USA, Europe, and Japan, but in the era of globalisation, drug companies have been steadily outsourcing their research enterprises to the developing world. According to an article in the New England Journal of Medicine, approximately one third of the trials conducted by the 20 largest US-based pharmaceutical companies now take place abroad, many in developing countries. Western research institutions also play a significant role in trialling drugs in the developing world, with particular emphasis on diseases such as HIV/AIDS, TB and malaria.

Some argue the globalisation of clinical research brings global benefits, enabling pharmaceutical companies to test new drugs more quickly and effectively. But others argue ‘Big Pharma’ is exploiting the poverty of ill people in the developing world, by taking advantage of their need for medical help in order to make the maximum profit from new drugs. There is a concern that powerful companies and research institutions cannot be held to account by the poor, sick and frequently illiterate people who often become part of clinical trials, and that citizens of resource-poor countries are being used as guinea pigs for drugs. But others point out the dangers of adopting patronising attitudes to countries such as India that are in a state of transition, both in the diseases that afflict the population and where successful home grown companies are conducting clinical trials of their own products. So, who benefits from clinical trials conducted in the developing world? And are current regulations and practices adequate to ensure citizens of resource-poor countries are not exploited?

Judges

Sangeeta Bahadur, minister (Culture), High Commission of India; director, the Nehru Centre

Diana Gibb, professor of epidemiology; programme leader, Paediatric Programme, MRC Clinical trials unit, London

Rob Killick, co-founder and CEO, cScape

 

 

Speakers
Arushi Dhupia
student, Our Lady Queen of the Missions School

Payaswini Tailor
student, Our Lady Queen of the Missions School

Georgia Haigh
sociology student, LSE

Aaron Stead
economics student, University of Portsmouth; president, Debating Society; alumnus, Debating Matters Competition

Chair:
Justine Brian
director, Debating Matters Competition

Produced by
Helen Birtwistle history and politics teacher, South London school
Session partners





in association with


Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Commons people: music in a digital age
Commons people: music in a digital age

Saturday 20 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Garden Room

From the legend of Robert Johnson trading his soul with the Devil through to censor-baiting ‘gangsta’ rap, musicians have traditionally held the role of rebellious outlaws pushing legal and cultural boundaries. Yet since the rise of internet and file-sharing sites such as Napster, it is music fans and consumers who increasingly find themselves hauled before the courts, sometimes at the behest of their musical icons. The controversy over the website Pirate Bay, with prosecutions and multi-million dollar lawsuits giving rise to an international political movement in the form of the Pirate Party, is merely the most high-profile cause celebre highlighting the difficulties of managing intellectual property in a digital age. Numerous government reviews and legislation (including the notorious Digital Economy Act in the UK and SOPA/PIPA in the US) indicate a general dissatisfaction on all sides with copyright, but little agreement or common ground.

For popular music, the sides are as intensely fought as they are blurry. The suppression of art-works such as famous Beatles/Jay-Z mash-up The Grey Album due to lack of permissions is held as outright censorship, with some questioning whether genres such as hip-hop could ever have reached the mainstream in today’s climate. The irony that live music and concerts are thriving in the internet age is held as an example of industry hypocrisy and short-termism, while the success of iTunes and Spotify implies the average consumer is happy to pay for their music in some form. Yet artists and musicians can be understandably more protective of copyright when ensuring they receive fair attribution and remuneration for original work which others can profit from or from preventing its use in contexts they don’t approve of.

In a world where the production as well as distribution of music is becoming easier and cheaper, is copyright simply a device to keep an antiquated record industry in business? Or in shouting about ‘freedom’, are anti-social file-sharers just trying to excuse and rationalise stealing goods which do not belong to them? In over a decade since Napster was forced to close, has there been much progress in adapting to the new digital frontiers?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Helienne Lindvall
award-winning professional songwriter; musician; music and media columnist, Guardian

Alan Miller
chairman, Night Time Industries Association (NTIA)

Andrew Orlowski
executive editor, Register; assistant producer, All Watched Over By Machines Of Loving Grace

John Waters
Irish newspaper columnist; author, Jiving at the Crossroads and Was It For This? Why Ireland Lost the Plot

Chair:
Jacob Reynolds
consultant, SHM Productions

Produced by
Jacob Reynolds consultant, SHM Productions
Recommended readings
Musicians win copyright extension to 70 years

Artists including Sir Cliff Richard had argued they would lose royalties, but will now gain protection until at least 2033

Josh Halliday, Guardian, 12 September 2012

How to fix the broken internet economy: START HERE

Tech and copyright – it's time to work together

Andrew Orlowski, Register, 13 July 2012

Behind the music: Changing copyright laws won't solve everything

Vince Cable claims changing copyright laws could bring an £8bn boost to the British economy. But even when the changes make sense, it's hard to imagine them generating so much money

Helienne Lindvall, Guardian, 19 June 2012

Letter to Emily White at NPR All Songs Considered.

Fairly compensating musicians is not a problem that is up to governments and large corporations to solve. Rather, fairness for musicians is a problem that requires each of us to individually look at our own actions, values and choices and try to anticipate the consequences of our choices.

David Lowery, Trichordist, 18 June 2012

Other Ways to Think About the Copyright Debate

Do we, as a society, value our artists and the arts as a whole? Do we appreciate them enough to support them so that the arts can continue to grow and that artistic expressions of ideas can be protected? Or do we believe that all artistic works should be free, no matter the cost, even if that cost includes the actual content creators themselves?

Simon Tam, Music Think Tank, 11 April 2012

'Don't break the internet': How an idiot's slogan stole your privacy...

For 15 years internet companies have been waging a war against any kind of laws that establish properties and permissions for digital things. Every attempt to do so has been bitterly fought. It's the one constant in Silicon Valley's battles against the copyright industries.

Andrew Orlowski, Register, 9 April 2012

Cory Doctorow on copyright and piracy: 'Every pirate wants to be an admiral' - video

Blogger and activist Cory Doctorow argues that all new media – from sheet music to cable TV – is accused of piracy by the mainstream ... until it becomes the mainstream

Guardian, 30 May 2011

This digital utopianism is glorified piracy

The chattering classes’ passion for free file-sharing and disdain for creators’ rights is a betrayal of art and its practitioners.

Andrew Orlowski, spiked, 9 October 2008

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Can the law make us equal?
Can the law make us equal?

Saturday 20 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Cinema 1

It has become a maxim of Western society that citizens should be equal before the law. A legal system that discriminates against minorities is widely recognised as a symptom of an unjust society. But does this mean the law should be used to make society itself more equal? Since the Equality Act 2010 has been on the statute books, a number of cases have shown how the law is being used to challenge and punish discriminatory attitudes, in the name of greater equality and the celebration of diversity. Some have welcomed this as a move towards a more just society, while others condemn it as illegitimate ‘judicial activism’.

Take, for example, the Christian couple who were successfully sued in 2011 by two gay men to whom they had refused a room in their bed & breakfast. While many saw this as a victory for tolerance, some argued that the act had limited the rights of the Christian couple to choose with whom to mix or not. Since then, Christian lobby groups have argued that the provisions of the act should apply equally to protect Christians from prejudice. Apart from the fact that it may be impossible to legislate to protect everyone in society from prejudice, another more fundamental question arises: is it dangerous to use the law to change people’s minds?

Historically, changes in the law have always codified and reflected attitudes in wider society. However, rather than simply back-up prevailing beliefs, should the law start ‘taking the lead’? Racial desegregation in the US in the 1950s and 1960s certainly involved legal coercion, but it was also driven by a mass movement for equality. In the case of something like equal recognition for gay marriage in the US and UK, or proposals that corporate boards should contain a certain proportion of women, it remains unclear whether legal moves are ‘with the tide of history’ or merely promoting an eccentric, elite agenda. If the law is allowed to intrude into private decisions about whom we employ, for example, or with whom we associate or do business, we are denied the right to make these decisions independently. Is this justified in the name of equality? Or is a society in which people only decide to treat others equally because the law tells them to really an equal society at all?


Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
David Allen Green
legal correspondent, New Statesman; writer of acclaimed Jack of Kent blog

Alex Deane
managing director, FTI Consulting; Sky News regular; BBC Dateline London panellist; author Big Brother Watch: The state of civil liberties in modern Britain

John Fitzpatrick
professor of law and director, Kent Law Clinic, University of Kent, Canterbury

Wendy Kaminer
US-based writer on law, liberty, feminism, religion, and popular culture; author, Worst Instincts: cowardice, conformity and the ACLU

Chair:
Luke Gittos
criminal lawyer; director of City of London Appeals Clinic; legal editor at spiked; author, Why Rape Culture is a Dangerous Myth: From Steubenville to Ched Evans

Produced by
Luke Gittos criminal lawyer; director of City of London Appeals Clinic; legal editor at spiked; author, Why Rape Culture is a Dangerous Myth: From Steubenville to Ched Evans
Recommended readings
Should the law try and correct society's prejudices?

While the 2010 Equality Act seems to be discouraging prejudice, it has also come under attack for limiting freedom

Luke Gittos, Independent, 18 October 2012

In the courts, equality trumps tolerance

Four cases before the European Court of Human Rights show how the state puts ‘diversity’ before religious freedom.

Jon Holbrook, spiked, 18 September 2012

A Laboratory for the Advancement of Women

The heated political debate continues in Germany over whether or not the country needs a gender quota at the highest levels of the private sector. Norway introduced such measures years ago -- and they have been extremely effective. What are the secrets of the country's success?

Anna Reimann, Der Spiegel, 29 May 2012

Let’s call it quits on the equality law

The Equality Act is less about ending oppression and more about enforcing state-approved behaviour.

Luke Samuel, spiked, 29 February 2012

Gender quotas are wrong and don’t work – it’s time to treat people as individuals

The left-wing clarion call for gender quotas and positive discrimination is not just anti-meritocratic in principle – it is also counter-productive in practice.

Dominic Raab, City AM, 13 February 2012

The equality commission deserves our support

The Equality and Human Rights Commission has problems – but it makes a huge contribution to British life

Tom Pegram, Guardian, 6 October 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: European Spring?
European Spring?

Saturday 20 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Pit Theatre

Perry Anderson in his book The New Old World argued that the ‘contempt for elementary principles of democracy shown by the elites of the [European] Council and Commission… is reciprocated by the disdain of the masses for the Parliament that supposedly represents them, who ignore it in ever increasing numbers’. Many commentators today share his awareness of a divide between European politicians and their electorates. There has been a long-term trend of disengagement and apathy with respect to the EU: evidenced in a secular decline in electoral turnout. The recent emergence of new social movements – the Indignados, Occupy, the Pirate Party, to name a few – may represent a growing consciousness of the problem as well as a desire to address it. Is there a chance that the people could be about to forge a new European demos?

The huge numbers of unemployed (particularly among the young), the crippling levels of debt, fears of inflation, the spectre of beggar-thy-neighbour protectionism across Europe all cry out for a new politics, for new solutions, to match them. And not much in the way of alternatives has been on offer for years. But do these new movements and parties really represent an alternative? Much of their appeal seems to lie in a rejection of politics itself: maybe best expressed by the German Pirate Party’s demand for a ‘liquid politics’, a technological realisation of politics beyond left and right. This parallels the response of European leaders like Angela Merkel and Manuel Barroso, which has often seemed to lean towards a wish that the messy business of democracy would just go away or, at least, be suspended for a while so the crisis could be cleaned up by the experts.

Might there be something to fears that politics might be taking a new populist turn across Europe? Do populists actually offer a way out of the crisis, or are they lying to the electorate, only gaining votes from those with nothing to lose rather than those with something to gain? And what should we make of the ease in which elected governments have been swept aside in Italy and Greece to name but two? When a Polish foreign minister calls for German leadership to save Europe, should we be relaxed about its economic and political muscle today? When the language of force is back in use in European politics, is it so irresponsible to fear for our futures? What is the reality of European politics today? And what shape might it have tomorrow?

Speakers
Dr Thierry Baudet
teacher, Leiden Law School; former columnist, NRC Handelsblad; author, The Significance of Borders: why representative government and the rule of law require nation states

Brian Denny
convener, No2EU - Yes to Democracy

Matthias Heitmann
freelance journalist; contributor, NovoArgumente; columnist, Schweizer Monat

Karl-Erik Norrman
founder and secretary-general, European Cultural Parliament; former Swedish ambassador; author, The Gala Concert, Verdi/Wagner 200 years

Eszter Salgó
adjunct professor, international relations, American University of Rome

Dr Nikos Sotirakopoulos
lecturer in sociology, University of Loughborough; author, The Rise of Lifestyle Activism: From New Left to Occupy

Michał Sutowski
political scientist and columnist, Krytyka Polityczna, Poland

Chair:
Bruno Waterfield
Brussels correspondent, The Times; co-author, No Means No

Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Recommended readings
A scale model of European implosion

The budgetary austerity zealously applied by Madrid has revitalised demands for independence in Barcelona. Engaged in a fiscal and economic power struggle with the central government, Catalonia is threatening to disrupt the social and regional equilibrium that underlies Spanish democracy.

José Manuel Pureza, presseurop, 2 October 2012

The EU is an empire, and empires mean war

We are often told that the EU has brought peace to Europe. However, this view is not shared by historian Thierry Baudet who provocatively argues that a process in which nation states give up their sovereignty inevitably results in conflict. That is why he recommends dissolving the euro and restoring national borders.

Thierry Baudet, presseurop, 9 July 2012

The Significance of Borders

For almost three-quarters of a century, the countries of Western Europe have abandoned national sovereignty as an ideal. Nation states are being dismantled: by supranationalism from above, by multiculturalism from below.

Thierry Baudet, Brill, 1 June 2012

Pirate Party: giving politics a jolly roger

The cyber-rights obsessives are not a ‘fresh wind’ - they just show how much politics is screwed.

Matthias Heitmann, spiked, 15 May 2012

The New Old World

The New Old World looks at the history of the European Union, the core continental countries within it, and the issue of its further expansion into Asia. It opens with a consideration of the origins and outcomes of European integration since the Second World War, and how today's EU has been theorized across a range of contemporary disciplines

Perry Anderson, Verso, 1 August 2011

No politics please, we’re trying to protest!

A Greek student reports on how ideology has been expelled from the anti-government protests in Athens and elsewhere.

Nikos Sotirakopoulos, spiked, 15 June 2011

Jobbik: a party born of humiliation

The recent electoral success of Hungary’s right-wing parties rests on a deep ground swell of powerlessness and frustration.

Eszter Salgó, spiked, 29 April 2010

EU, Euro,

The peoples of Europe are being subjected to a scare campaign, which predicts doom and disaster should the Euro collapse. But, writes Brian Denny, the peoples have in any case never been promised anything but pie in the sky. Here he outlines a new pamphlet on the promises and lies of 'social Europe'.

Brian Denny, Communist Party

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Water, water, everywhere: not allowed to use it
Water, water, everywhere: not allowed to use it

Saturday 20 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Garden Room

The hosepipe ban introduced in England earlier this year was the signal for it to rain for months on end. Soaked commuters on London platforms faced posters of cracked dry earth stating: ‘none of us can make it rain but we can all use less water’. Thames Water even resorted to sending ‘drought speakers’ into schools to educate children in using less water and to pester their wasteful, albeit squeaky-clean, parents into changing their behaviour. No wonder there was popular resentment and widespread scepticism about the so-called ‘drought’ whatever the realities of low rainfall over the last two years. Nevertheless, on an international level, there has been much talk of a global water crisis in addition to fears of water wars erupting over this sought-after resource.

The United Nations Development Programme says that water scarcity is ‘rooted in power, poverty and inequality, not in physical availability’. Throughout history rivers have been diverted to supply water to where it is needed and in London a new desalination plant, built despite the objections of no-flush Ken Livingstone, now supplies a million people with fresh water. So, why in Britain today is something so apparently plentiful as water in such short supply? The Romans were master builders of aqueducts, and a 500 kilometre-long water pipeline was built a century ago in Western Australia. Modern engineering should make accessibility to clean water even easier. In the twenty-first century, why can’t we move water from sodden Scotland to scorched Sussex? Is the problem that rural communities with plenty of water would resent sending it to those thirsty tennis court-watering London city types? Or is water just too darn cheap?

Should we consider water a commodity rather than a human right? Just because something is essential, why should that make it cheap? A higher price would surely be the spur for people to value and use water as they would any paid-for, vital and finite resource. But sceptics say we risk irreversible damage to natural water supplies and the environment if we hike up the price and enable expensive water transfer systems and costly desalination plants to simply satisfy our demands for beautiful golf greens. Should we accept that we need to turn off the tap or might paying a bit more for unlimited quantities and guilt-free daily power showering be worth the price?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Chris Binnie
independent water consultant; member, ICE Water Expert Panel; fellow, Royal Academy of Engineers

Dr Caspar Hewett
Lecturer in civil engineering at Newcastle University, and director of The Great Debate

David Lloyd Owen
managing director, Envisager; author, The Sound of Thirst

Andy Wales
senior vice president, sustainable development, SABMiller

Chair:
Craig Fairnington
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; university finance and accommodation officer

Produced by
Craig Fairnington associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; university finance and accommodation officer
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Recommended readings
Water: An Issue That Requires Collaboration

The world faces a projected 40 percent shortfall in freshwater by 2030, according to a study by the 2030 Water Resources Group. Seventy percent of the water humans use now goes toward agriculture. So it's no surprise that the central theme of the annual World Water Week conference held last week in Stockholm is how to produce more food while using less water in the process.

Andy Wales, Huffington Post, 20 September 2012

The Water Food Energy Nexus

Water, food and energy are interconnected: agriculture accounts for about 70% of global freshwater use and can pollute freshwater supplies if mismanaged. Water is also used to generate electricity. Successfully addressing the triple challenge of water stress, food security and energy supplies means taking a holistic view and balancing the many competing demands

SAB Miller, 26 August 2012

A Potential Underground Solution to Africa's Water Shortage

The discovery of a 10,000-year-old supply of water in an underground aquifer in northern Namibia, near the border with Angola, could potentially reshape the developing nation’s ability to cope with the effects of climate change and rising population.

Michael Dolgow, Bloomsberg Businessweek, 1 August 2012

One calls in Third City to promote ethical product range

One, the ethical consumer brand, has signed up Third City as its retained agency following a four-way pitch.

John Owens, PR Week, 2 July 2012

Shortages: Water supplies in crisis

Over the past 40 years the world's population has doubled. Our use of water has quadrupled. Yet the amount of water on Earth has stayed the same.

Roger Harrabin, BBC News, 19 June 2012

The Sound of Thirst

Water, water, everywhere. Or is it? The Sound of Thirst explains the urgency of taking water and waste water seriously in an age where good management and political will are chronically scarce.

David Lloyd Owen, Parthian Books, 1 June 2012

There’s no such thing as a natural drought

Never mind the lack of rain in recent UK winters - it is our willingness to invest and build big that has really dried up.

Rob Lyons, spiked, 3 May 2012

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: In search of originality: navigating the artistic canon
In search of originality: navigating the artistic canon

Saturday 20 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Fountain Room

The Prado and the Louvre, the Barbican Centre and the Lincoln Center, the Concertgebouw and the LA Philharmonic: all champion the greats, the established and traditional. But how does this significant artistic heritage, much of it European, relate to wider society today? Is there a genuine enthusiasm for the likes of Wagner and Leonardo, Picasso and Puccini, keeping the culture of the past fresh and alive? Or are today’s passive consumers simply lapping up the repackaged greatest hits of yesterday?

Of course the great global arts centres also showcase the new: operas by Philip Glass and Thomas Adès, art by Grayson Perry or Tracey Emin, to name a few. How do these works of art relate to the recognised and traditional canon? Do contemporary artists find inspiration within it or in their distance from it? Or do they draw on their own experience and particularity? And is society’s ability to distinguish and comprehend an art form becoming less straightforward? Take popular music: once there were recognisable subcultures like Mods, Rockers, Punks, Indie and so on. In the 1990s, some argue, these subcultures decomposed, leaving us with the isolation of the DIY Spotify generation today. There can appear to have been a process of fragmentation of forms with its logical end point in the mashup. And equally, pop phenomena like Adele, Lana Del Rey or Justin Bieber seem to have been created from scratch by record labels, stage schools and talent shows. What space does this leave for original, coherent artistic work to be achieved in an increasingly saturated, as well as short-termist, environment? Is there a danger that the arts might be becoming something like World Music? Apparently for us all, but really an entirely new invention lacking roots. Fine artists appear almost overnight as global superstars – aptly parodied in Exit Through the Gift Shop – and are self-defined rather than identified in terms of any particular artistic tradition or movement.

Or is this all just nostalgia for a certain generation’s lost youth? Creativity, originality and strong cultural identity require time and tradition but also a willingness to embrace the unknown, the uncharted, the new. The arts can help to unearth this within any field, but is society thirsty for this? Is this pioneering spirit prevalent and nurtured? What needs to be done to aid this search?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Joe Friggieri
professor of philosophy and former head of department, University of Malta; poet; playwright; theatre director; three-times winner, National Literary Prize

Piers Hellawell
composer; professor of composition, Queen's University Belfast

Jane McAdam Freud
sculptor and multi-disciplinary artist; teacher in sculpture, Central St Martins, University of the Arts London and Morley College, London

Igor Toronyi-Lalic
arts editor, the Spectator; co-director, the London Contemporary Music Festival

Karl Sharro
architect; writer; Middle East commentator; co-author, Manifesto: Towards a New Humanism in Architecture

Chair:
Dr Tiffany Jenkins
writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there

Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Tom Hutchinson clarinettist; teacher; arts project manager, Royal Philharmonic Society
Recommended readings
Shock of the old

Frieze Masters offers a fresh perspective on historical art by highlighting the dialogue between the old and the new

Susan Moore, Financial Times, 5 October 2012

Music Tomorrow 1: Nonclassical

Classical music is changing. There are operas in bars, Baroque bands in pubs, circus acrobats in concert halls. Rock stars compose. Classical clubbing is de rigeur. What is going on? In this series of articles, Paul Kilbey talks to some of the key figures making changes in classical music, and tries to make some sense of it all.

Paul Kilbey, bachtrack, 14 September 2012

What's That Thing?

An exclusive excerpt from Igor Toronyi-Lalic's report on the state of British public art

Igor Toronyi-Lalic, Artsdesk, 4 June 2012

Whatever happened to ambition? Architecture and the culture of low expectations

As the distinctive profile of The Shard continues to rise over London Bridge, it’s worth contemplating what this latest addition to London’s skyline signifies. Regardless of its relatively modest size, it is an example of the quality of architecture that London deserves but doesn’t get much of. Why is this energetic city that attracts creative talent from all over the world deprived of highly-ambitious works of architecture?

Karl Sharro, karlsharro.co.uk, 2010

Whatever happened to visionary architecture?

Architecture today, even at its most innovative, seems to lack a visionary quality.

Karl Sharro, karlsharro.co.uk, 2005

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Campaigning for freedom
Campaigning for freedom

Saturday 20 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Hammerson Room

A discussion, led by the civil liberties group Manifesto Club which campaigns against the hyper-regulation of everyday life. Come along and discuss the practicality, tactics and strategy of building a freer society.

Speakers
Simon Clark
director, smokers’ rights group, Forest; Action on Consumer Choice.

Guy Herbert
general secretary, NO2ID; contributor, Guardian’s Comment is free and Samizdata

Anton Howes
director, Liberty League

Chair:
Josie Appleton
director, civil liberties group, Manifesto Club; author, Officious: Rise of the Busybody State
Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Capitalism: kill or cure?
Capitalism: kill or cure?

Saturday 20 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Cinema 1 Keynote Controversies

The Western economic slump is conventionally attributed to a surfeit of capitalism, a market that is too free and insufficiently regulated. The financial crisis of 2008-9 is often assumed to have been caused by the unrestrained greed of bankers, personifying the financial excesses that crashed the economy. This narrative extends into a wider critique of the problems said to result from ‘neoliberal’ ideology. David Cameron, for example, quotes variants of GK Chesterton’s phrase, we have ‘too much capitalism and too few capitalists’, as he distances himself from what is termed crony or irresponsible capitalism. The heartless free market is said to exacerbate social exclusion: too much pay for the rich is said to widen inequality and reduce social mobility; too much consumption and we over-exploit and endanger the planet to the detriment of future generations; too much debt from trying to live off the future produces an economic millstone that condemns us to years of austerity.

Some, however, argue that the state has become increasingly involved in a market that, far from being free, is much more heavily controlled than ever before. In this view, our current problems are really caused by the absence of a genuine capitalism; society is being let down by too few people being prepared to promote the virtues of capitalism, with tomorrow’s entrepreneurs being driven offshore by punitive tax demands, and the business sector choked by health-and-safety legislation and bureaucratic red tape. For such critics, a political climate in which even the Financial Times can appear supportive of the Occupy movement, and in which governments plump for bailing out uncompetitive industries in the interests of short-term political expediency, can hardly be described as overly capitalist. Maybe capitalism actually needs to be freed up to renew itself through ‘creative destruction’; to concentrate on being profitable rather than responsible. Such critics demand a much-reduced role for the state to set the animal spirits of capitalism running free.

So is the market too free or too constrained? Is it as simple as cutting the red tape or must the state continue to take a leading role in kick-starting growth? If it does not, might the reality of contemporary capitalism pose an unacceptable cost to life and liberty? Just how can we manage capitalism in the twenty-first century?


Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and chose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Ferdinand Mount
author, The New Few: or a very British oligarchy; former editor, Times Literary Supplement

Phil Mullan
economist and business manager; author, Creative Destruction: How to start an economic renaissance

Vicky Pryce
board member, Centre for Economics and Business Research; economic advisor, British Chamber of Commerce

Mike Short
senior vice-president, industry affairs, SABMiller

Chair:
Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination

Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Phil Mullan economist and business manager; author, Creative Destruction: How to start an economic renaissance
Recommended readings
Does economic growth make you happy?

The case against making increased GDP per capita the overriding policy objective is that it doesn’t deliver the increased happiness or welfare if promises.

Robert Skidelsky, TLS, 28 September 2012

Greekonomics: The Euro crisis and why politicians don't get it

Politicians ignored or downplayed these in creating the Euro and indeed made the problem worse by watering down the controls that were in place. If the Euro is to survive in the long term, even greater political and fiscal integration and cooperation will be required.

Vicky Pryce, Biteback Publishing, 9 September 2012

We must inject some capitalism into banks

Banks are one of Britain’s great assets but they have lost their way; we must urgently inject some real capitalism back into the City.

Allister Heath, Daily Telegraph, 23 July 2012

The New Few: Or a Very British Oligarchy

This was supposed to be the era when democracy came into its own, but instead power and wealth in Britain have slowly been consolidated the hands of a small elite, while the rest of the country struggles financially and switches off politically.

Ferdinand Mount, Simon & Schuster, 26 April 2012

The debt crisis is only the canary in the mine

Demonising debt distracts us from what caused the public-debt crisis in the first place – the sluggishness of the productive economy.

Phil Mullan, spiked, 13 March 2012

Session partners



in association with


Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Telling off the grown-ups
Telling off the grown-ups

Saturday 20 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Frobisher Auditorium 2

Too often adults seem powerless in the face of young people behaving badly. During last summer’s riots, well-equipped police officers looked on impotently as teenagers looted shops and even confronted the police themselves. Teachers complain they no longer have official support to deal with misbehaviour. Strict teachers stand in dread of malicious complaints of abuse. On the streets, adults avoid reprimanding misbehaving kids for fear of being accused of inappropriate interference. And as MP David Lammy controversially commented, parents are wary of disciplining their own children in a society where smacking is conflated with child abuse. Many a parent has been threatened with a call to ChildLine when trying to get their children to do as they’re told. Children today expect to be negotiated with, convinced and have their opinions taken into account.

It seems we are witnessing a topsy-turvy ‘reverse socialisation’. While adults feel deprived of options to discipline children, kids are all-knowing, rights-bearing, disapproving. It sometimes seems it is the young who feel they are in charge. Whether it is smoking, recycling, healthy eating, using excessive electricity or driving cars, adults often find themselves under a barrage of criticism, and it is our children who are telling us off. ‘Mum, don’t you know fatty foods are bad for me’; ‘Dad, your smoking indoors is killing me.’ And children cannot fail to notice adults are constantly told their own disciplinary methods are problematic. Meanwhile, teachers face school councils and pupil representatives who are given official encouragement to assess the standard of lessons by OFSTED and sit on interview panels for school staff. And with endless political initiatives chastising adults in front of children for their bad habits, from drinking to leaving the lights on, how can children not internalise the message that Mum and Dad are ‘not the boss of me’?

Do we need to reassert the idea that children should respect their elders and adult institutions such as the law, the property of others and school? What incentive is there for children to want to grow up, or for teens to be mature, if all they can expect in return is to be told off like big children?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “save link as”)

Speakers
Professor Maurice Biriotti
founding trustee, SHM Foundation; CEO, SHM Productions Ltd; publisher, Youth-led investigation into the August riots 2011

Neil Davenport
sociology and politics teacher; writer on culture; former music journalist

Carl Emery
author, Children's Social and Emotional Wellbeing; lecturer, University of Manchester

KAS Quinn
children's writer; lecturer and educationalist; author, The Queen Must Die, first part of a time-travel trilogy

Chair:
Sally Millard
co-founder, IoI Parents Forum

Produced by
Sally Millard co-founder, IoI Parents Forum
Recommended readings
Scotland: the world’s most childish nation

The SNP thinks children should be trusted with votes in a referendum, but adults shouldn't be trusted with booze and fags.

Rob Lyons, spiked, 15 October 2012

How the nationalisation of parenting stoked the riots

The state’s relentless undermining of parental authority has created a world in which no one knows how to control children or teens.

Jennie Bristow, spiked, 17 July 2012

Why victim culture is running riot

Last year's English riots weren't down to government cuts but to a vast culture of self-pity and entitlement among the young.

Neil Davenport, spiked, 10 July 2012

Spoiled Rotten

With the exception of the imperial offspring of the Ming dynasty and the dauphins of pre-Revolutionary France, contemporary American kids may represent the most indulged young people in the history of the world.

Elizabeth Kolbert, New Yorker, 2 July 2012

Learning and Citizenship, including Youth-led investigation into the August riots 2011

In August 2011, rioting broke out in Tottenham, North London, and spread to other parts of the capital and then to several other cities. There has been much debate about the causes and consequences of the riots in the media, in the political arena, and across social networks.

SHM Foundation, January 2012

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Right to know: opening Pandora's box?
Right to know: opening Pandora's box?

Saturday 20 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Conservatory

From MPs to CEOs, political activists to journalists, it seems there is one thing they are happy to agree upon: the importance of being transparent. It doesn’t seem to matter what the particular issue involves: ever-greater transparency always seems to be part of the solution. Financial crisis? Make bankers’ earnings public. So virtuous is being transparent considered today, that the most high-profile anti-corruption organisation in the world is called… Transparency International. Many companies and organisations certainly want to let it all hang out: annual reports are now brimful with facts and figures. And it seems the government itself has embraced transparency too, with its plan to ‘proactively publish data’, including business plans, financial transactions and even lunch dates. But has this obsession with transparency, this insatiable right to know, gone too far? Is transparency necessarily a good thing?

In public, the vast majority of organisations and individuals claim to be enthusiastic about freedom of information laws. But in private, these laws are often experienced as an obstacle to be overcome. Little wonder many institutions employ whole departments of staff to cope with endless FOI requests, often from journalists fishing for stories, and sometimes from snoopers keen to gather dirt on opponents. Tony Blair, the prime minister responsible for pushing through the FOI legislation, was moved to declare it a ‘dangerous’ mistake. Current prime minister David Cameron has claimed it ‘furs up’ the arteries of government. And other organisations, such as banks or the NHS, now fear their duty to keep clients’ or patients’ transactions private will be compromised.

So is a cult of transparency causing as many problems as its advocates claim it solves? Critics argue that informal exchanges are inhibited: people have to be always on their guard, wary of giving an honest opinion. Who dares to try out outlandish ideas in a meeting, if the minutes might become front-page news? Others argue the culture of transparency may actually encourage more secrecy: ‘Text me instead of emailing’; ‘Phone me and I’ll tell you off the record’. Moreover, is the act of making decisions ‘behind closed doors’ really such a bad thing? After all, do we not value confidentiality when it comes to our own bank statements and our medical records? Has the ‘right to know’ reinvigorated the public understanding of how society really works, or simply ‘furred up the arteries’ of organisations and government? Or will transparency, the right to know, help to restore trust and accountability in society?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right click and choose “Save link as”)

 

Speakers
Stephen Barber
group managing director & head of group communications, Pictet & Cie

Professor Roger Graef
CEO, Films of Record; award-winning filmmaker, including the Bafta winning Police series, Police 2001, Turning the Screws, and The Secret Policeman's Ball; visiting professor, Mannheim Centre for Criminology, LSE

Andrew Keen
entrepreneur; founder, Audiocafe.com; author, Digital Vertigo: how today's online social revolution is dividing, diminishing, and disorienting us

Kirk Leech
interim director, European Animal Research Campaign Centre; government affairs, Association of the British Pharmaceutical Industry

Gilly Lord
partner, assurance practice, PwC

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive

Produced by
Dr Tim Black editor, Spiked Review
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
Bradley’s winnings

The big money to be made in finance now is from turning in your own firm

Economist, 15 September 2012

Tax, that unlikely window on our politicians' souls

Forcing office-holders to be open about their finances is one part of the US system to which we should fervently aspire

Marina Hyde, Guardian, 6 April 2012

The only solution is absolute transparency

It is incumbent upon Mr Cameron to institute an immediate policy of absolute transparency. That means not simply a list of dinners with donors. It means every engagement of any kind must be put into the public domain. The sacrifice of his personal privacy is a small price to pay to guarantee the incorruptibility of the highest office of the land.

Independent, 27 March 2012

Who’s responsible for Govegate?

‘Government by Gmail’ is the logical end result of the rise and rise of the weird cult of transparency.

Patrick Hayes, spiked, 27 September 2011

WikiLeaks and the liberal mind

Transparency is not the only liberal value. There are others, and these are important, too. For example, there is the value of legitimacy: those who wield power in the public interest should normally have some democratic mandate or accountability.

David Allen Green, New Statesman, 1 December 2010

This isn’t politics, it’s accountancy

The obsession with how much tax politicians pay confirms that the cult of transparency is destroying political debate.

Tim Black, spiked, 10 April 2010

Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Racism today: alive and kicking?
Racism today: alive and kicking?

Saturday 20 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Frobisher 4-6

Recently it seems football has been beset by a never-ending series of racist incidents: Liverpool’s Luis Suarez accused of racially abusing Manchester United’s Patrice Evra; Chelsea’s John Terry prosecuted for the racially aggravated harrassment of QPR’s Anton Ferdinand; and numerous fans arrested and prosecuted for racially abusing players either at the match or on social media. So concerned was prime minister David Cameron that he held an ‘anti-discrimination’ summit to deal with the racism he felt had ‘crept back’ into football. The Professional Footballers Association, meanwhile, has called for the sacking of any player found guilty of racist abuse. But just how much of a problem is racism in football? Do the recent high-profile cases really indicate the widespread existence of racist attitudes in sections of society? Or is it the perception of what racism is that has changed?

There are certainly many who do believe that, in the words of one academic, recent incidents ‘remind us all that racism remains a day-to-day reality for many people’. Ex-Liverpool player John Barnes insists that ‘until we get rid of it in society, it will exist in all walks of society’. But some are less certain of the magnitude of the problem. ‘Times have changed’, argued Labour MP David Lammy earlier this year: ‘Racist incidents at football grounds are major news precisely because they’re the exception when they were once the rule.’ Still others suggest that not only have times changed, but the meaning of racism has, too. Since the 1999 Macpherson report into the death of black teenager Stephen Lawrence, racism has been redefined as ‘any incident which is perceived to be racist by the victim or any other person’. As a result, racism can be seen anywhere and everywhere, irrespective of the existence of intentional discrimination. So is racism really undergoing a resurgence? Or is it that the changing perception of racism makes it appear to be a problem? Does simply using racist words make someone a racist? Are we seeing a return of racial discrimination, or a crusade against bad manners?

And why is football so frequently the focus of official anti-racism? One of the Crown Prosecution Service’s leading prosecutors recently called for the football authorities to put a stop to ‘inappropriate crowd behaviour and in particular chanting’. Is it a good thing that the state, once the source of institutional discrimination, is now leading the anti-racist charge and seeking to educate those who attend football matches as to what is and what isn’t appropriate? Or is anti-racism simply about getting uncouth football fans to adhere to PC etiquette?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Duleep Allirajah
sports columnist, spiked; Crystal Palace fan

Daniel Poohl
editor-in-chief, Expo; board member, Expo Foundation, Sweden

Syd Jeffers
senior lecturer in sociology, University of East London; Arsenal supporter

Sunder Katwala
director, British Future; former general secretary, Fabian Society

Chair:
Geoff Kidder
director, membership and events, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Book Club; IoI’s resident expert in all sporting matters

Produced by
Duleep Allirajah sports columnist, spiked; Crystal Palace fan
Geoff Kidder director, membership and events, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Book Club; IoI’s resident expert in all sporting matters
Recommended readings
Forget John Terry. Football has striven to fight racism

The fans on the terraces have set a standard that John Terry and his ilk would do well to follow

Sunder Katwala, Guardian, 1 October 2012

Racism in football still a significant problem, says report

Racism remains a

BBC News, 19 September 2012

Time for European football to face the racists

Michel Platini's remarks about Mario Balotelli's suggestion that he would walk off if subjected to racist abuse were ill-judged

Observer, 10 June 2012

Ferguson fears that racism is returning

United manager mystified by recent cases and wants any abuse to be tackled now

Ian Herbert, Independent, 8 February 2012

That’s enough anti-racist blather about Blatter

The obnoxious FIFA president had a point for once – and the real targets of the moral backlash are the masses who watch and play football.

Mick Hume, spiked, 21 November 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: A crisis of compassion: who cares?
A crisis of compassion: who cares?

Saturday 20 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Frobisher 4-6

A constant stream of harrowing media stories highlights incidents of extreme lack of compassion in institutions charged with caring for the vulnerable. The recent Delivering Dignity report is an attempt at addressing this perceived problem in the care of the elderly in hospitals and care homes. The 2011 Dilnot Report, responding to a situation where demand for adult social care is predicted to rise by 25 per cent in the next decade, argues for a ‘root-and-branch reform of the system’.

How can we tackle this supposed compassion deficit? Suggested solutions include checks for evidence of compassion, such as the evaluation of staff’s caring skills ‘as a measure of performance’, an emphasis on ‘dignity and compassion’ as core competences of the nursing syllabus and NHS recruitment procedures, and local dignity champions in every hospital. But can we really train people to be compassionate? Might this become no more than red tape and checklists? As the Alzheimer’s Society observes, ‘there is no such thing as a one size fits all approach to care’. Might such external measures even backfire and undermine carers’ confidence in their capacity to care for the old, infirm and vulnerable? Is the problem institutional, the NHS being too big and bureaucratic, the private sector being too interested in profit-making to care? Might we look back to the old charitable hospitals as a model, or indeed the contemporary hospice movement?

Or is there a deeper cultural problem? The popularity of TV programmes like the BBC’s Call the Midwife affirms an ongoing cultural validation of the ‘caring professions’, but do we as a society care less about each other? Superficially, we are encouraged to display our caring credentials with an assortment of plastic wristbands in support of various causes and to help our neighbour through the Big Society initiative. But with even volunteering widely promoted in schools as a way of boosting your CV, are we viewing compassion too instrumentally? If so, is there even an institutional fix? Even if no one had to pay for social care and ward sisters and staff threw out the checklists, would this mean an end to the disturbing headlines? Does the crisis in compassion for the elderly reflect a deeper lack of respect for wisdom and experience? What are the causes behind our seeming inability to care?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Alka Sehgal Cuthbert
educator, writer, doctoral researcher

Dr Ann Gallagher
reader in nursing ethics, University of Surrey; editor, Nursing Ethics

Christina Patterson
writer, broadcaster and columnist

Professor Raymond Tallis
fellow, Academy of Medical Sciences; author, philosopher, critic and poet; recent books include NHS SOS and Aping Mankind; chair, Healthcare Professionals for Assisted Dying

Chair:
Bríd Hehir
writer, researcher and traveller; retired nurse and fundraiser

Produced by
Bríd Hehir writer, researcher and traveller; retired nurse and fundraiser
Alka Sehgal Cuthbert educator, writer, doctoral researcher
Recommended readings
Why the 'couples where women do more housework stay together' study isn't shocking

The recent Norwegian study ‘Equality in the Home’ found higher divorce rates among couples who shared housework than among those where most of the tasks were carried out by the woman. What surprises me is that so many commentators were surprised by this.

Frank Furedi, Independent Voices, 1 October 2012

Blind search for profits behind care home abuse

Even in a euphoric Olympic week, a headline like “Mentally disabled adults abused at Christian Brothers’ home” would have grabbed the attention. It might even have ranked as a scandal – a term RTÉ was applying yesterday to some messing over a reception for our Olympians.

Fintan O'Toole, Irish Times, 14 August 2012

The 11 workers who admitted a campaign of cruelty, neglect and abuse against vulnerable patients in a care home from hell Read

Almost a dozen care staff played a part in the attacks at Winterbourne View in Bristol.

Daily Mail, 6 August 2012

Paying for Labors of Love

Arlie Russell Hochschild’s look at how we meet some of our most personal needs with the aid of paid strangers doesn’t try to be exhaustive; goes light on figures and statistics; and, when itemizing the most outrageous advances in the market for love and care, never lapses into that magazine journalist’s tone of wry amusement.

Judith Shulevitz, New York Times, 25 May 2012

How nursing should tackle its image problem

Professionals should work together to respond to the challenge of delivering care in a time of growing demands

Ann Gallagher, Guardian, 10 May 2012

What’s really behind the crisis in caring?

Last night’s BBC Panorama showed how grim some care homes are. But more bureaucratic monitoring is not the solution.

Alka Sehgal Cuthbert, spiked, 24 April 2012

Anne Milton: 'We need to raise the bar'

The Public Health minister used to be a nurse herself. To conclude the Independent's series on

Christina Patterson, Independent, 14 April 2012

My 10-point plan for change

A manifesto for better nursing.

Christina Patterson, Independent, 14 April 2012

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Lobbyists: the new hidden persuaders?
Lobbyists: the new hidden persuaders?

Saturday 20 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Conservatory

Is lobbying, in the words of David Cameron, ‘the next big scandal waiting to happen’? A series of high profile lobbying controversies suggest it could be: the resignation of defence secretary Liam Fox over his ties to Adam Werrity, public affairs agency Bell Pottinger’s ‘bragging’ about access to government, the revelations to the Leveson Inquiry about contact between News Corp’s lobbyist Frederick Michel and culture secretary Jeremy Hunt’s special adviser Adam Smith. And industry support for All Parliamentary Groups and the existence of firms solely created to influence politicians reinforce suspicions that politicians are buyable. One commentator argues politicians should be forced to dress like Formula 1 drivers displaying the logos of all their ‘sponsors’. Lobbying is now regularly characterised as ‘legalised bribery’. In response, the government is considering a statutory register of lobbyists, which could result in PR agencies, trade unions and charities being subject to fines and even imprisonment for ‘improper attempts’ to influence politicians. One of Barack Obama’s first acts as US president was to clamp down on the ‘revolving door’ which sees members of the administration walk straight into highly paid private sector jobs.

Transparency International UK tells us that there are five lobbyists to every politician, which sounds like a worrying development. But is it such a bad thing that politicians speak to representatives of relevant industries, unions and campaign groups before formulating policy? If politics is about the clash of different interests, is lobbying not an integral part of the democratic process? Would we rather have supposedly incorruptible, and unelected, judges and civil servants in power? Moreover, many lobbyists represent civil society groups rather than big business; Greenpeace is as much in the lobbying game as Bell Pottinger. Trade unions still aspire to negotiate for workers’ rights over beer and sandwiches at Number 10. Every charity has public affairs professionals to make their case to government ministers, whether on minimum alcohol pricing or nuclear power. Indeed the NGO sector is split on the issue, with some keen to expose unfair corporate influence on decision-making and others concerned regulation might be too severe.

Ironically, many lobbying charities are dependent on state money, and are described by critics as ‘sock puppets’, which allow government to lobby itself. Are such lobbyists bypassing democracy? Is it a problem that so much political debate is conducted behind closed doors by paid professionals, rather than by citizens openly in the public sphere? Or is there a danger that increased demands for audit and control and oversight of lobbying will undermine a key element of democracy?

Listen to session audio

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”

Speakers
Simon Burall
director, Involve; chair, Democratic Audit; ambassador, WWF UK

Eliane Glaser
writer and radio producer; author, Get Real: how to tell it like it is in a world of illusions

Oliver Foster
managing partner, Pagefield

James Matthews
management consultant; founding member, NY Salon; writer on economics and business

Mary Monfries
partner, PwC; member, tax leadership team

Chair:
Kirk Leech
interim director, European Animal Research Campaign Centre; government affairs, Association of the British Pharmaceutical Industry

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Kirk Leech interim director, European Animal Research Campaign Centre; government affairs, Association of the British Pharmaceutical Industry
Recommended readings
The inexorable rise of the PR men

With firms like Bell Pottinger working for foreign governments, we must now question everything more, not less.

Alan White, New Statesman, 17 September 2012

Sock Puppets: How the government lobbies itself and why

In the last fifteen years, state funding of charities in Britain has increased significantly while restrictions on political lobbying by charities have been relaxed. 27,000 charities are now dependent on the government for more than 75 per cent of their income and the ‘voluntary sector’ receives more money from the state than it receives in voluntary donations.

Christopher Snowden, Institute of Economic Affairs, June 2012

The politics of persuasion gone wrong

Lobbying is an important part of democracy - but where does the line of acceptable behaviour lie?

Dan Hough, New Statesman, 27 April 2012

Introducing a Statutory Register of Lobbyists

The Coalition Government is committed to introducing a statutory register of lobbyists. The Government already releases a significant amount of information at www.data.gov.uk. But we need to go further; a statutory register of lobbyists is an important step towards making politics more transparent. We are determined to keep working to open up politics, to make it more accessible to everyone.

HM Government, January 2012

OpenSecrets.org

OpenSecrets.org is the nation's premier website tracking the influence of money on U.S. politics, and how that money affects policy and citizens' lives.

Center for Responsive Politics

The Alliance for Lobbying Transparency: Campaigning to end secrecy in lobbying

Lobbyists are paid to influence government decisions. So, whether it's the private healthcare lobby pushing for the current NHS reforms; or banks lobbying against reform of the financial system; or the construction industry wanting to get their hands on greenbelt land, the activities of lobbyists affect our lives in countless ways.



Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: All together now: the rise of the choir
All together now: the rise of the choir

Saturday 20 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Fountain Room

Choirs have been with us a long time. They have their origins in Greek tragedy and the Italian Renaissance. Fifty years ago they were commonplace in our schools, workplaces and social organisations, but until recently we’d come to associate them with Christmas concerts and village halls. Now though, they are making a spectacular comeback. Like the growth of book clubs, debating societies and various specialist-interest groups, choirs have benefitted from a renewed interest in communal activities.

New choirs are popping up around the country, as are singing workshops and festivals such as Voicelab at the South Bank Centre, the Barbican’s Extraordinary Voices and the annual celebration of all things choral, Voices Now, which was launched in 2011 at the Roundhouse in London. However, it is the huge success of BBC series The Choir and its various spin-offs, that has most clearly demonstrated the renewed public interest in all things choral. With little more than the wave of his conducting stick, TV presenter and charismatic choirmaster Gareth Malone, transforms sullen school kids into beaming angels and shy, stay-at-home housewives into confident, strutting divas, ready to take on the world. And the sight of happy, smiling faces hasn’t escaped the attention of social policymakers, increasingly concerned with managing our mental and physical health. Music associations too, have begun to present the benefits of choral singing in social terms. According to national choir representative body Making Music, community music groups ‘impact social cohesion, individual wellbeing’ and are ‘the perfect embodiment of the Big Society in action’.

So what is it that motivates people to get together once or twice a week on often cold winter evenings just to sing along with others? Does choral singing really have the power to uplift and transform individuals and communities, as some claim? And if choirs do have such magical qualities, should we use them to help mend ‘Broken Britain’?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Suzi Digby
music educator; choral conductor, London Youth Choirs; founder, Vocal Futures and Voices Foundation; OBE, services to music education

Tessa Marchington
pianist; founder, Music in Offices; co-founder (with Wu Qian), Surrey Hills Music Festival

Robin Osterley
chief executive, Making Music; director, Association of Chief Executives of Voluntary Organisations

Professor David Vinden
tutor; teacher of Kodály Musicianship; chorus master, Guildhall School of Music

Dr Kevin Yuill
senior lecturer, history, University of Sunderland; author, Assisted Suicide: the liberal, humanist case against legalization

Chair:
Niall Crowley
freelance designer and writer

Produced by
Niall Crowley freelance designer and writer
Recommended readings
Music and wellbeing

As the UK’s number one organisation for voluntary music, we feel passionately that the more music people make together, the healthier and happier we all are.

Making Music, 10 October 2012

Choirs are magical - but should they be a social tool, too?

There's a risk that in using choirs for everything from helping fragmented communities to stress relief, we drag them down to the level of the mundane

Niall Crowley, Independent Voices, 10 October 2012

Our Manifesto

Our vision is of communities and individuals flourishing through music making. This manifesto is intended to show how that vision can be realised in the context of music & wellbeing.

Making Music, 1 February 2012

We’re all equal here: singing together is the great leveller

It doesn’t matter how much you earn, what your job is, where you went to school or who you know. Just add your voice to the overall sound.

Chris Rowbury, From the front of the choir blog, 22 January 2012

It saddens me that choir can't solve everything

Can Britain’s favourite choirmaster, the man who taught boys to love singing, now make them love school as well?

Jane Wheatley, The Times, 12 October 2010

Choral singing and psychological wellbeing

Over 600 choral singers drawn from English choirs completed the WHOQOL-BREF questionnaire to measure physical, psychological, social, and environmental wellbeing, and a 12-item “effects of choral singing scale.”

Stephen Clift, Grenville Hancox, Ian Morrison, Bärbel Hess, Gunter Kreutz, and Don Stewart, International Symposium on Performance Science, 2007

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Euro and the economy: the final countdown?
Euro and the economy: the final countdown?

Saturday 20 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Pit Theatre

The economic crisis in Europe has become the new normal, a continual background to daily life. Every attempt at stabilisation seems to fall apart, every austerity measure seems to shrink GDP and boost unemployment, every firewall is raced through by capital in flight, every demand for more integration is met with calls for customs borders and protectionist tariffs. So why does the Euro, let alone the EU, continue to exist? Given the continuing rise of China, India and the rest of the developing world, does Europe even have an economic future except as a tourist destination? Or, just as the global financial crisis morphed into a series of sovereign debt crises, might Europe’s woes engulf states worldwide?

Despite fears that Europe as a whole would unravel should Greece exit, attitudes in Brussels and Germany changed quickly as that prospect became more and more likely. Could redefining Europe around a northern, German-dominated model work? Is there a distinction to be made between fiscally prudent countries and their irresponsible and profligate neighbours? Was it right to expect Greece to be more ‘realistic’ and be more like Bulgaria? And why is there such hostility to the idea that countries like Greece, Spain, Portugal or Ireland might be better off with devalued currencies to increase their competitiveness? Closer economic integration seems the only game in town, but surely there is a basic democratic right to decide how our wealth should be distributed: one that is ignored when money goes to bail out Ireland or Spain. There is also a danger, now bailouts have firmly enshrined moral hazard into the banking system, that national economies are being damaged by being kept afloat rather than allowed to fail. The extent of this distortion can be seen in the fact that investors are prepared to take negative returns on German bonds: security is the overriding concern.

Certainly Germany – with its exports, low inflation and unemployment – could be argued to be getting something right. But not every country can be export-led. Nor does every country have the same productivity, and low wages, as Germany – a reality that myths about lazy southern workers express in a crude form. Would the amount of restructuring required to boost productivity and competitiveness at the national level break the structures of the EU? Would the human cost be acceptable? Or could it be achieved across Europe by supra-national action? By the ECB forcing through fiscal and political union on top of monetary? When it comes to the prospects for the European economy, just what is myth and what is reality?

Speakers
Declan Ganley
chairman and CEO, Rivada Networks; founder and chairman, Libertas Institute

Alexander Horn
economics editor, NovoArgumente; consultant (logistics, production and organisation), German automotive industry

Philippe Legrain
visiting senior fellow, LSE’s European Institute; author, Immigrants: your country needs them and European Spring: Why Our Economies and Politics are in a Mess – and How to Put Them Right

Phil Mullan
economist and business manager; author, Creative Destruction: How to start an economic renaissance

Matina Stevis
economics reporter, Dow Jones Newswires and Wall Street Journal

Chair:
Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination

Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Recommended readings
Climate change: EU rebrands green energy campaign Roger Harrabin, BBC News, 8 October 2012

A scale model of European implosion

The budgetary austerity zealously applied by Madrid has revitalised demands for independence in Barcelona. Engaged in a fiscal and economic power struggle with the central government, Catalonia is threatening to disrupt the social and regional equilibrium that underlies Spanish democracy.

José Manuel Pureza, presseurop, 2 October 2012

Why exit is an option for Germany

Should Germany leave the euro? It is, after all, the big country with an obvious exit option.

Martin Wolf, Financial Times, 25 September 2012

Draghi alone cannot save the euro

Is there any way the ECB on its own could make it more credible that the eurozone will last? The answer is: yes and no.

Martin Wolf, Financial Times, 11 September 2012

Greekonomics: The Euro crisis and why politicians don't get it

Politicians ignored or downplayed these in creating the Euro and indeed made the problem worse by watering down the controls that were in place. If the Euro is to survive in the long term, even greater political and fiscal integration and cooperation will be required.

Vicky Pryce, Biteback Publishing, 9 September 2012

Paul Krugman:

To save the single currency beset by difficulties that stem from its initial design, Economics Nobel Prize laureate Paul Krugman argues that Europe should set its sights on low inflation but forget about implementing uniform austerity measures.

Philippe Coste, presseurop, 6 September 2012

The Fight for Democracy - The Libertas Voice in Europe

Declan Galey explains how Libertas wants to turn the European Union into a democratic institution that ordinary Europeans can believe in.

Bruce Arnold, Killynon House Books, 1 May 2012


Session partners



in association with


Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Youth today: unemployed or unemployable?
Youth today: unemployed or unemployable?

Saturday 20 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Frobisher Auditorium 2

For many commentators, the riots in England during August 2011 were a consequence of youth unemployment and despair. With over one million youths aged 16-24 currently unemployed in the UK, and a sharp rise in the number of young people who have been claiming unemployment benefit for more than a year, joblessness among the young is a pressing social and economic problem. Moreover, Europe’s youth more broadly are said to be a generation who can expect to grow up poorer than their parents, with 5.5million 15- to 24-year-olds without a job in the EU, a rate of 22.4 per cent, up from 15 per cent in early 2008.

Nevertheless, unemployment among the young has been a feature of British society before. In the past people often moved to find work; today a record number of young people remain at home living with their parents. Some employers suggest the young are little practised in the habits of work. While some campaigners dubbed the coalition government’s welfare-to-work programme as ‘slave labour’, Marks and Spencer’s CEO Stuart Rose defended it as ‘getting people into the routine of working, making sure they are up in the morning… (that) they’re presentable… arrive on time… know what it’s like to have a properly constructed work programme’. Certainly, lack of jobs seems only part of the story. Under New Labour, the job market expanded with close to a million new jobs created; yet the vast majority of vacancies were filled by young foreign workers. Even in the current recession, young migrants fill jobs British youth won’t touch. Job agencies prefer foreign workers because employers complain of a poor work ethic among young Britons, while failures in basic literacy and numeracy also prevent many young Britons securing work.

Do young people just need more get up and go and a more ‘can do’ attitude, or are such cultural explanations for unemployment merely a cover for a sluggish market’s failure to provide work opportunities? Should we accept uncritically that unemployment and poverty can have a destructive long-term impact on young people? Or are there other malignant forces distorting young people’s sense of themselves and society? Does youth unemployment leave a permanent scar on young people’s future prospects, and were the riots related to their lack of opportunities? Are British youth more unemployable than unemployed?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Tess Lanning
research fellow, Institute for Public Policy Research (IPPR); author, From Learning to Earning: understanding the school-to-work transition in London

Jo Lopes
head of technical excellence, Jaguar Land Rover

Shiv Malik
freelance investigative journalist; co-author, Jilted Generation: how Britain has bankrupted its youth; contributor, Prospect

Peter Smith
director of tourism, St. Mary’s University College, Twickenham, London; co-author, Volunteer Tourism: the lifestyle politics of international development

Chair: Joel Cohen
communications manager, BeyondMe

Produced by
Joel Cohen communications manager, BeyondMe
Peter Smith director of tourism, St. Mary’s University College, Twickenham, London; co-author, Volunteer Tourism: the lifestyle politics of international development
Recommended readings
Youth unemployment: the crisis we cannot afford

The costs of these levels of long-term youth unemployment – now and in the future – are enormous. This is a crisis we cannot afford

The ACEVO Commission on Youth Unemployment, 2012

From learning to earning: understanding the school-to-work transition in London

Young people today are better educated than their counterparts in the 1970s, but the average time it takes to secure stable work is much longer. This paper explores the nature of young people’s transitions from school to work in the capital, with implications for national policy.

Tess Lanning, IPPR, 22 August 2012

Berlin’s cyber-bohemians don’t want to work Don Alphonso, Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitung, 14 August 2012

Jaguar Land Rover to recruit 133 new apprentices

Car manufacturer Jaguar Land Rover (JLR) says it is launching its largest recruitment of apprentices.

BBC News, 2 February 2012

Jilted Generation: How Britain Has Bankrupted Its Youth

Instead of creating a new world, their actions really fostered a nation riddled with inequality, elitism and political corruption. "Jilted Generation" sets out how the next generation might succeed where this one failed.

Ed Howker & Shiv Malik, Icon Books Ltd, 2 September 2010


Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Lessons from America: the new culture wars
Lessons from America: the new culture wars

Saturday 20 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Cinema 1 Keynote Controversies

‘The culture war is back’, proclaimed one American newspaper earlier this year. And it’s not difficult to see why. A variety of social issues, be it gay marriage or contraception, have seemingly cleaved America in two. The tribal battle lines look familiar: on one side the socially conservative, the Christian, the blue-collar; on the other, the liberal progressive, the secular, the white-collar. American politics is now steeped in culture-war polemic. Former Republican presidential candidate and social conservative Rick Santorum talked darkly of the liberals’ ‘organised war on religion’, and his adversary, the progressive President Obama, has charged that heartland America ‘clings to religion’. But is there anything new about the current revival of the culture wars?

For those immersed in the numerous conflagrations, claims of a resurgent culture war are often rejected. This is about the rights and wrongs of a particular issue, we are told: gay marriage is, depending on whom you listen to, a matter of civil rights or one of traditional values; the exemption of religious bodies from Obama’s contraception mandate is a matter of religious freedom or women’s reproductive rights. But are these battlegrounds in fact part of a broader war between two almost entirely divergent moral communities? When Edmund White, a longtime opponent of gay marriage came out in support of it because he ‘realised how opposed to [gay marriage] the Christian right is’, did this reveal the real impetus behind such cause-fighting? Given the vituperative language used, from ‘redneck’ and ‘hick’, to ‘racist’ and ‘homophobe’, are self-styled liberals now proving themselves as illiberal as the Christian fundamentalists they rail against?

And are we seeing the emergence of something similar in the UK? When prime minister Tony Blair introduced civil partnerships back in 2004, there was virtually no fanfare. Current prime minister David Cameron’s gay-marriage proposals, however, have been presented as a cultural marker, a test of what kind of person you are. So are debates about religion or gender issues now being conducted in terms of an emerging cultural battle, one that marks out liberals from conservatives on the American model? If so, it is not only liberals making moves. The sight of angry anti-abortion campaigners arrayed outside an abortion provider has become familiar in the UK as well as the US, and the abortion debate seems to have become more antagonistic since Conservative MP Nadine Dorries’ attempt to strip abortion providers of their role counselling pregnant women. But what does all this mean? Are long-held rights and traditions really at stake, or are we witnessing the emergence of a type of politics in which fighting for a cause is less important than marking oneself out as a certain type of person?

Watch the debate

 

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Professor Frank Furedi
sociologist and social commentator; author, What's Happened to the University?, Power of Reading: from Socrates to Twitter, On Tolerance and Authority: a sociological history

John Haldane
professor of philosophy, University of St Andrews; chairman, Royal Institute of Philosophy; author, An Intelligent Person's Guide to Religion and Reasonable Faith

Wendy Kaminer
US-based writer on law, liberty, feminism, religion, and popular culture; author, Worst Instincts: cowardice, conformity and the ACLU

John Waters
Irish newspaper columnist; author, Jiving at the Crossroads and Was It For This? Why Ireland Lost the Plot

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive

Produced by
Dr Tim Black editor, Spiked Review
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
There’s more to politics than values

The Democrat convention was big on moral posturing about gay marriage and abortion, but short on serious strategy.

Helen Searls, spiked, 13 September 2012

Gay marriage: importing America’s culture wars has backfired on David Cameron

The Prime Minister is in retreat over gay marriage – but he should never have picked the fight to begin with.

Fraser Nelson, Daily Telegraph, 10 May 2012

Why Do We Care What Obama Thinks About Gay Marriage?

A declaration for or against gay marriage would have symbolic -- not legal -- value.

Wendy Kaminer, Atlantic, 9 May 2012

Liberalism, Marriage and Family Values

Clegg takes liberal values to be incompatible with certain kinds of social arrangements, or at odds with the state endorsing and supporting them, and these include a traditional understanding of marriage and the family.

John Haldane, Standpoint, May 2012

Gay marriage: redrawing the American political map

In officially endorsing same-sex marriage, Obama is signalling that the Democratic Party now has little interest in its old blue-collar supporters.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 14 March 2012

Election 2012: the return of 'culture wars'

Until now, we thought this campaign would be all about the economy. It still will – but 'values' voters are going to count, too

Gary Younge, Guardian, 10 February 2012

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Engineering design or design engineering?
Engineering design or design engineering?

Saturday 20 October, 1.29pm until 2.59pm, Garden Room

Engineering is sexy again – not old-fashioned and dirty, but novel and creative. On 22 May 2012 private company SpaceX’s Falcon 9 rocket blasted off with a Dragon capsule headed for the International Space Station. SpaceX is the child of PayPal entrepreneur Elon Musk, and aimed at creating a human presence on Mars as well as other commercial ventures in space. Richard Branson is working on SpaceShipTwo, offering flights 60 miles up. Scramjet technology in planes offers the possibility of any destination on Earth being just 90 minutes away. The Bugatti Veyron Super Sport can travel at 267 miles per hour. Mulder Design’s ‘World is Not Enough’ Millenium 140 superyacht skims the seas at 70 knots. All miracles of engineering design that transform the barriers of space and time. But are these just the playthings of the rich and powerful? Boyhood doodles turned into reality (for the very, very few) by adult riches? Designer wet dreams or the shape of things to come for us all?

After all, back on planet earth, we can’t fly by Concorde anymore and our cars are nothing that Henry Ford couldn’t have imagined. Haven’t the fundamentals of planes, trains and automobiles remained much the same? Or is this to miss important changes? Modern design techniques have certainly altered the way we experience these forms of travel. It is not only billionaires who can afford travel at levels of comfort that bear no resemblance to driving in a Model T, which came in any colour you wanted so long as it was black. It’s not just a question of aesthetics. The design of modern factories and production processes allow rapid repurposing of machinery to such a degree that we don’t have to take a one-size-fits-all product. The level of customisation offered, not just in cars, but in many consumer products, may represent a real improvement on what went before. Or is this just tarting up the same old timber? Are we seeing engineering push the boundaries of possibility for humanity or just sketching castles in the air? Are we all going to go faster or is modern design a bit like putting a mirror in an elevator, a distraction to help pass the time?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Kerry Kirwan
deputy head of materials and manufacturing and strategic director of the International Doctorate Centre at WMG, University of Warwick

Dr Natasha McCarthy
head of policy, British Academy; member, steering committee, Forum for Philosophy, Engineering and Technology

Kevin McCullagh
founder, Plan

Dr Paul Reeves
engineering software designer, SolidWorks R&D (part of Dassault Systèmes); convener, manufacturing work group for Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation

Andy Richardson
Head of Simulation, Jaguar Land Rover Product Engineering

Chair:
Martyn Perks
digital business consultant and writer; co-author, Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation

Produced by
Martyn Perks digital business consultant and writer; co-author, Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation
Recommended readings
Engineers, be bold - Britain needs grander designs

A dearth of real engineering ambition is holding back the sector. Big, ambitious projects are needed to put us back on track.

Paul Reeves and Martyn Perks, Independent Voices, 8 October 2012

British innovation is not dead. But it needs public investment to flourish

The potential of innovation to transform lives is as great as ever. Politicians should see that economic recovery depends on it

Stian Westlake, Guardian, 7 October 2012

Bloodhound supersonic car rocket test fired

The team building a car designed to drive faster than 1,000mph has tested the vehicle's rocket engine. The motor for the Bloodhound Supersonic car burned for 10 seconds on a static rig inside a hardened shelter at Newquay airport, Cornwall.

BBC News, 4 October 2012

Engineering a recovery

Where are we going to find new jobs and growth in the British economy? Software, social media and mobile phone app development? Not according to Sir James Dyson - he says the government is ignoring the importance of hardware and engineering, which provide far more jobs.

Rory Cellan-Jones, BBC News, 26 September 2012

Glass Works: How Corning Created the Ultrathin, Ultrastrong Material of the Future

Lighter than aluminum, harder than high-carbon steel, and many times stronger than regular soda-lime glass, Pyroceram eventually found its way into everything from missile nose cones to chemistry labs. It could also be used in microwave ovens, and in 1959 Pyroceram debuted as a line of space-age serving dishes: Corningware

Bryan Gardiner, Wired, 25 September 2012

Design Wants to Be Free

An object is no longer something you merely consume. It’s something you create. Famed industrial designer Yves Behar explains why this shift is a revolution in the making.

Yves Behar, Wired, 25 September 2012

Architects propose a floating airport for London

Architectural firm Gensler is proposing the construction of a floating airport on the surface of London's River Thames Estuary. Dubbed the London Britannia Airport, its concourse would sit in the center of the Thames Estuary, surrounded by runways that float, and tethered to the seabed.

Aaron Souppouris, Verge, 10 September 2012

Sorry luvvies, but Britain’s real business creativity lies elsewhere

Lancaster House is this week playing host to the British Business Embassy, a series of events highlighting UK business to a world audience captivated by London 2012.

Damian Reece, Daily Telegraph, 2 August 2012

Make it in Great Britain event lacks the spark of inspiration

It’s about time British manufacturing got the recognition it deserved. The government’s Make it in Great Britain campaign shows politicians have finally woken up; not just to the need to grow our manufacturing sector, but also to the fact that we already have a world-class industry.

Stephen Harris, Engineer, 28 July 2012

Move to open sky for Skylon spaceplane

The UK government says it is working to put in place the regulations that would license the operation of spaceplanes.

Jonathan Amos, BBC News, 12 July 2012

Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Whatever happened to the Arab Spring?
Whatever happened to the Arab Spring?

Saturday 20 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Frobisher 4-6

At the beginning of last year, it seemed the people of the Arab world were finally throwing off decades of despotism. Leaders fell, first in Tunisia, then in Egypt, and people took to the streets elsewhere, from Bahrain to Syria. One newspaper editorial announced, ‘Something remarkable is happening, or rather, still happening: The “Arab Spring” — the uprising of pro-democracy, anti-dictator movements driven largely by young people across the Middle East — is surging along, country by country, intensifying rather than fizzling.’ The enthusiasm was widespread. This, many commentators proclaimed, was the ‘Berlin Wall moment’ for the Middle East. Another remarked confidently that ‘Arabs now have a shared, unstoppable drive for freedom’.

But what has happened since? Has the Arab Spring lived up to its perceived promise? It certainly doesn’t look that way. In Egypt, the military still wields considerable power, despite recent elections; in Tunisia, a similar stalemate prevails. Elsewhere the picture looks grimmer still. Syria is in the grip of an intractable civil conflict, in Bahrain and Saudi Arabia dissent has been effectively repressed, and in Libya the fall of Gaddafi has led not to a bright democratic future but to fragmentation and instability. And for some commentators the prevalence now of the Muslim Brotherhood as a major regional political force signifies not a spring, but ‘a winter of Islamic jihad’.

But what does the current situation in the Middle East actually mean? Does it suggest that the Arab world is still not ready for democracy proper? That nations like Syria, Libya, Egypt even, still need Western tutelage? There are certainly those who suggest political immaturity and democratic inexperience explain the Arab Spring’s stalling. But do such views rest on a misinterpretation of Arab Spring itself? Did the one-time cheerleaders, now voicing their disappointment at the diverse directions of the various uprisings, misinterpret the uprisings in the first place? Was what looked like the eruption of people power actually driven by the falling apart of the old order? And is what we’re seeing now not so much the stalling of change than various ruling elites looking to stem the unravelling? And what of the people themselves? Do the present difficulties indicate that Syrians or Libyans or Bahrainis are incapable of realising political and social change without Western help?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Rania Hafez
programme leader, MA Education, Greenwich University; fellow, The Muslim Institute

Mark Seddon
writer and broadcaster; author, Standing for Something: life in the awkward squad

Karl Sharro
architect; writer; Middle East commentator; co-author, Manifesto: Towards a New Humanism in Architecture

Nadim Shehadi
associate fellow, Middle East and North Africa Programme, Royal Institute of International Affairs, Chatham House

Chair:
Dr Tara McCormack
lecturer in international politics, University of Leicester; author, Critique, Security and Power: the political limits to emancipatory approaches

Produced by
Dr Tara McCormack lecturer in international politics, University of Leicester; author, Critique, Security and Power: the political limits to emancipatory approaches
Recommended readings
The Shattered Remains of US Middle East Policy

The shocking attack on the US consulate in Benghazi late on Tuesday that left four Americans dead abruptly revealed the fragility of America’s position in the post “Arab Spring” Middle East

Karl Sharro, Al-Akhbar, 13 September 2012

The 'Arab Spring' and other American seasons

The uprisings have raised great economic expectations on the part of the majority of Tunisians and Egyptians.

Joseph Massad, Aljazeera, 29 August 2012

We will pay a high price if we do not arm Syria’s rebels

Sooner or later some combination of the opposition groups will indeed control Syria. And when they do, their memories of who did what during the struggle to achieve a democratic Syria are going to matter far more to the US and Europe than policy makers presently calculate.

Anne-Marie Slaughter, Financial Times, 31 July 2012

Time to consider military options in Syria

It is ludicrous to wait for the Syrian opposition overseas to unite under the banner of the Syrian National Council. Instead it is through the local co-ordinating committees of activists and the revolutionary councils in towns across the country that western powers need to advance, and justify, a more robust strategy.

Roula Khalaf, Financial Times, 5 June 2012

This house believes that military intervention in Syria would do more harm than good.

Left alone, could the crisis in Syria develop into a conflict that could destabilise the entire Middle East? But what would be the costs of a military intervention? Could it make things even worse for Syria?

Economist, 21 February 2012

Syria and the hole at the heart of the Arab revolts

Events in Syria suggest that nobody has the authority to resolve the Arab crisis – not the US, not the regimes, and sadly not the rebels either.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 8 August 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: UK RIP?
UK RIP?

Saturday 20 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Pit Theatre

The future of the UK came into doubt last year when the Scottish National Party won a surprise majority in the Scottish parliamentary elections and pledged to hold a referendum on a fully independent Scotland. Polls suggest most Scots are not in favour of independence, and the SNP victory had more to do with disillusionment with the other parties. Nevertheless, the prospect of independence is now real, and it affects more than just the Scottish electorate. Those in favour of maintaining the Union often struggle to make a positive case for it beyond the appeal of history and tradition. So might we, as one commentator put it, be ‘sleepwalking into the break-up of the Union’? For some English observers, the loss of Scotland would be no bad thing, providing an opportunity to reaffirm a distinctive English identity. But for others this raises uncomfortable questions about ethnicity and culture. Britishness is sometimes championed as a modern, post-ethnic identity in which multiculturalism can flourish, but is this either historically credible or a sufficient basis for national cohesion in the future? Is the UK a tenable political entity?

The rationale behind the campaign for devolution in the 1990s was that, for years, Scottish voters had consistently voted Labour, while English votes meant it was the Conservatives who consistently formed governments at Westminster. Paradoxically, it took a Labour victory in 1997 to bring about devolution, arguably just at the point it had become redundant. Much of the contemporary debate about Scottish independence focuses on practical issues over the economy, oil and military matters, but there are also questions of principle at stake. If Scotland did go it alone, what would that means for England and Wales? And what would it mean to be an Ulster Unionist? As for Scotland itself, SNP leader Alex Salmond talks of establishing an independent nation within the European Union. But even leaving aside recent economic problems within the EU, is it meaningful to talk of ‘independence’ within a technocratic supranational entity? What does the debate about Scottish independence tell us about the meaning of British nationhood and its prospects for the future?

Speakers
Craig Fairnington
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; university finance and accommodation officer

Joyce McMillan
chair, Hansard Society Working Group in Scotland; judge, 2010 Saltire Scottish Book of the Year Award; theatre critic, Scotsman

Max Wind-Cowie
deputy director, ResPublica

Chair:
Justine Brian
director, Debating Matters Competition

Produced by
Craig Fairnington associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; university finance and accommodation officer
Recommended readings
British success at the Olympics is a nightmare for Alex Salmond and the SNP

A successful British showing at the Olympics doesn't automatically mean that the Unionists will win an independence referendum in 2014. But the contrast between Nationalist peevishness and the generous, optimistic, outward-looking spirit of the British effort at London 2012 will boost Unionist morale and add to the sense that the game is drifting away from Salmond.

Iain Martin, Daily Telegraph, 4 August 2012

What does it mean to be British?

As Scotland prepares itself for a vote on independence, the question of these identities is prescient. And Britishness is nothing if not a plural set of identities: encompassing not just English, Welsh, Scottish or Northern Irish strands, but British Asian, British Carribean, British Jewish, and any number of other ethnic and regional identifications.

Samira Shackle, New Statesman, 11 June 2012

The social union between Scotland and the UK: how would it fare with independence?

Crucial to the argument for Scottish independence is the idea that leaving the political union of the United Kingdom will not mean leaving the social union. But what is this 'social union'?

Cailean Gallagher, openDemocracy, 30 January 2012

A Place for Pride

A Place for Pride finds that there is disconnect between political narratives of patriotism and ordinary citizens’ pride in Britain. Drawing on qualitative research with over 2,000 British people from England, Wales and Scotland, this pamphlet argues that patriotism does not, and should not, come from either top-down narratives about Queen and country nor from so-called ‘progressive’ notions based on values.

Max Wind-Cowie, Tom Gregory, Demos, 18 November 2011

Why Alex Salmond is not Braveheart

The author of The Illusion of Freedom: Scotland Under Nationalism traces the rise and rise of the SNP.

Craig Fairnington, spiked, 10 May 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: High and low culture: separated at birth?
High and low culture: separated at birth?

Saturday 20 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Cinema 1 Lunchtime Debates

‘For a mass society is nothing more than that kind of organised living which automatically establishes itself among human beings who are still related to one another but have lost the world once common to all of them.’ Hannah Arendt, Between Past and Future

The closing ceremony of the Olympics 2012 was dubbed ‘A Symphony of British Music’, but there was little that was classical about it. Despite the presence of the London Symphony Orchestra, supporting pop group Elbow, this symphony was all Spice Girls not Vaughan Williams, Russell Brand not Elgar; avowedly modern and popular. Of course there is no reason a closing party should not have a rocking soundtrack, but in many areas today it appears that the dethroning of what was once deemed ‘high’ culture has gone so far that the music of Queen, by default almost, is better than Handel. Is there such a separation between the adherents of different ‘cultures’ as to amount to a total communication breakdown between their camps?

‘Good society’, the taste of elites, has long been struggling to respond to the emergence of the masses into public life, and not just in popular forms of culture, but even the mannered aping of culture that Matthew Arnold attacked among the philistine bourgeoisie of the nineteenth century. Since the end of the Second World War, the decline in the authority of traditional forms of culture has become more and more evident: think of the late Robert Hughes’ Shock of the New; British ‘In-Yer-Face’ theatre; Schoenberg, Phillip Glass and John Cage. Or the vast numbers of questionable initiatives designed to attract new audiences to opera, galleries and concert halls. Is yesterday’s ‘high’ culture being consigned to today’s museum? Should we lament its passing? Try to preserve it? Or accept its day had come and that it’s only misplaced cultural nostalgia to imagine that what we have today is in anyway inferior? Might it even be better?

Maybe the difficulty is with our ability to discriminate between what is good and what doesn’t make the grade, between ‘high’ and ‘low’. Maybe it is our cultural judgement that has eroded, rather than classical music itself having somehow passed its sell-by-date. In the past, after all, high and low rubbed up together and influenced each other: think of composers like Dvořák and Janáček, both influenced by folk music. Is there a possibility today for such a healthy interchange between pop and classical? TV and art-house film? Street dance and ballet? Damien Hirst and Jack Vettriano? Or, in an avowedly non-judgemental age, one of relative values, of ‘I like what I like because I like it’, is what was once potentially a common and shareable cultural world, now irretrievably shattered? Reduced to the lonely perspective of the individual, as unique to him as his birth, or, on the other hand, to the mass spectacle, to entertainment rather than culture?

Listen to session audio:

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Ivan Hewett
chief music critic, Daily Telegraph; professor, Royal College of Music; broadcaster; author, Music: healing the rift

Dr Tiffany Jenkins
writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there

Roly Keating
chief executive, British Library; formerly first Director of Archive Content, BBC; former Controller, BBC Two; member, Barbican Centre Board

Chair:
Dolan Cummings
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Recommended readings
At last: the Classic Brit Awards exposed as a sickening crime against classical music

The truth is that there is simply no need to go down the Classic Brit route. What you are in effect saying with this monstrous spectacle is that Joe Public is too uncultured, too dense, too stupid to deal with an unedited, beautifully played Chopin mazurka, Mendelssohn concerto or Beethoven sonata.

James Rhodes, Daily Telegraph, 8 October 2012

Great literature should stay on all reading lists

A knowledge of Chaucer, Shakespeare and tales of Greece and Rome is necessary to understand our own culture

Hannah Betts, Guardian, 7 October 2012

Music Tomorrow 1: Nonclassical

Classical music is changing. There are operas in bars, Baroque bands in pubs, circus acrobats in concert halls. Rock stars compose. Classical clubbing is de rigeur. What is going on? In this series of articles, Paul Kilbey talks to some of the key figures making changes in classical music, and tries to make some sense of it all.

Paul Kilbey, bachtrack, 14 September 2012

The pernicious rise of “indie-classical”

If you think classical music is snobbish, just take a look at indie culture.

En Liang Khong, New Statesman, 23 July 2012

Opera for the masses, by the masses?

What Graham Vick and his company demonstrate so well is that opera, regardless of when, where and by whom it was made, can speak to us all and enrich our lives.

Niall Crowley, Independent, 15 March 2012

Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Bored of the Booker: prizes, prizes, everywhere
Bored of the Booker: prizes, prizes, everywhere

Saturday 20 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Fountain Room

The decision of the Pulitzer Prize 2012 board not to award the prize for fiction once again focused attention on the role of literary awards. Some praised the brave and unusual step of the selection committee for feeling they genuinely couldn’t choose between the novels of David Foster Wallace, Karen Russell and Denis Johnson. Yet, for others, it represented an opportunity missed in terms of boosting sales and raising the profile of any would-be winners. On the other side of the Atlantic, the perception that the 2011 Booker Prize privileged ‘readability’ over artistic merit provoked leading literary figures to devise the Literature Prize to ‘establish a clear and uncompromising standard of excellence’. Yet the Literature Prize merely joins an ever-expanding list of possible garlands for published authors, most notably the Women’s Prize for Fiction (formerly the Orange Prize), Costa Book Award, the Guardian First Book Award, the Warwick Prize for Writing, the James Tait Memorial Prize… Today, some argue, not being awarded a prize, or even refusing one, is more of a mark of distinction than winning an award.

Critics of prizes generally dismiss them as cynical marketing ploys from publishers or as exercises in elitism, largely governed by literary cliques and fashions. For their defenders, they provide a vital role in developing and supporting new writers, while offering an essential dose of critical judgement in the public arena. Yet with judging panels increasingly made up of celebrities and other non-literary figures (and sometimes being done away with altogether in favour of a popular vote) there seems to be a certain unease from both sides over what role the public should play in proceedings, and a lack of consensus over what constitutes excellence and artistic value or makes a work challenging. The decision to award obscure Swedish poet Tomas Tranströmer the Nobel Prize for Literature in 2011 can hardly be said to have generated a popular interest in his work.

Are literary prizes part of a healthy critical culture, or do they risk becoming an unhappy replacement for it? While plenty are willing to criticise a culture of ‘all must have prizes,’ is it true that being unwilling to make judgements (on a variety of criteria) is just as corrosive to literature? Are some prizes better than others? Who are the real winners, and are there any losers?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Damian Barr
writer and salonierre; creator and host, Shoreditch House Literary Salon; author, Maggie and Me

Miguel Fernandes Ceia
writer, critic and translator; editorial assistant, Writers' Hub; contributor, Culture Wars

Professor Russell Celyn Jones
director, Creative Writing Programme, Birkbeck College, University of London

Alexandra Pringle
group editor-in-chief, Bloomsbury Publishing Plc.

Chair:
David Bowden
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer

Produced by
David Bowden associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer
Miguel Fernandes Ceia writer, critic and translator; editorial assistant, Writers' Hub; contributor, Culture Wars
Recommended readings
Forget the Booker, the prize every author really wants is academic validation

There's so many prizes today's writers aren't bothered about who wins. The purpose awards serve now is to tell readers what to read.

Miguel Ceia, Independent, 16 October 2012

A loss for words

Literary prizes exist to give dog shows a good name. Most literary prizes get it mostly wrong.

Richard Flanagan, Sydney Morning Herald, 16 June 2012

Orange is not the only fruit: why book prizes, not sponsors, matter to writers

Prizes give one novelist a chance; a chance to go on writing, to produce a body of work, to do so without financial anxiety.

Linda Grant, Guardian, 22 May 2012

What’s wrong with a readable book?

Good writers write good books; excellent writers write good books people buy, read and enjoy in great and lasting numbers. Prizes that call people’s attention to books like that are good; those that actively discourage them are just ridiculous.

Bert Archer, Star, 22 October 2011

How the National Book Awards made themselves irrelevant

The NBA has come to indicate a book that somebody else thinks you ought to read, whether you like it or not.

Laura Miller, Salon, 12 October 2011

And the winner is?

We enjoy the glamour of a Booker or an Oscar night, but we lose something too in this orgy of awards.

Jason Cowley, Guardian, 22 October 2006

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Battle book launch and discussion: <i>There Is No Such Thing As a Free Press</i>
Battle book launch and discussion: There Is No Such Thing As a Free Press

Saturday 20 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Hammerson Room

Mick Hume, editor-at-large of online magazine spiked will discuss his new book There Is No Such Thing As a Free Press with Patrick Hayes, reporter for spiked.

The aim of this book is to launch a polemic for the freedom of the press against all of the attempts to police, defile and sanitise journalism today.

Once the media reported the news. Now it makes it. The phone-hacking scandal and the Leveson Inquiry into the ‘culture practice and ethics’ of the media has put the UK press under scrutiny and on trial as never before.

There Is No Such Thing As a Free Press questions many of today’s distorted but widely-held views of the media, and turns the assumptions underlying the current discussion on their head.

Mick Hume draws on the lessons of history and cross-examines the evidence from the Leveson Inquiry to take on the army of conformists and regulators who would further tame press freedom.

Speakers
Mick Hume
editor-at-large, online magazine spiked; author, Trigger Warning: Is the Fear of Being Offensive Killing Free Speech?

Chair:
Patrick Hayes
director, British Educational Suppliers Association (BESA)

Produced by
Patrick Hayes director, British Educational Suppliers Association (BESA)
Recommended readings
There is No Such Thing as a Free Press ...and we need one more than ever

Once the media reported the news. Now it makes it. The phone-hacking scandal and the Leveson Inquiry into the culture, practice and ethics of the media has put the UK press under scrutiny and on trial as never before.

Mick Hume, Imprint Acaademic, 1 September 2012


Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Gas galore? Fracking and the future of energy
Gas galore? Fracking and the future of energy

Saturday 20 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Garden Room

While headlines have been dominated by financial instability in Europe and the fallout from the Arab Spring, another revolution has quietly taken place: the energy crisis may be over. The discovery of enormous reserves of readily exploitable shale gas and other ‘unconventional’ sources of energy have transformed previously pessimistic discussions around an ‘energy crunch’, with predictions that the US could be entirely self-sufficient by 2030, and the UK and Europe not far behind. Not only might Western nations no longer need to rely on volatile supplies from the Middle East: some leading experts suggest North America could become its rival, even its supplier. The spectres of brown-outs, oil shocks, and fuel rationing could be now banished to the last millennium.

Yet beyond such optimistic possibilities, serious questions remain. Deep-water oil drilling and tar sands are far from allaying fears over the safety practices and sustainability of the ‘dirty’ fossil fuel industry. While shale gas is relatively clean, the process of ‘fracking’ has met with hostility from environmental campaigners, with a forthcoming Matt Damon film The Promised Land joining Oscar-nominated documentary Gasland in opposition. Despite scientific studies stating that the earthquakes caused by fracking are no more dangerous than those regularly caused by conventional mining techniques, there remains considerable opposition to exploiting this resource. The UK government has given the go-ahead to fracking only with the promise of strict regulation, while France, Bulgaria and some US town councils have already issued moratoriums. Inside the industry, there are fears that the massive infrastructural overhaul required to make gas a viable alternative may hamper the potential offered by this abundant and cheap supply. The ongoing controversies over nuclear power, with Germany acting to close all reactors by 2017, offer a reminder of what can happen to an energy industry without strong political and social support. The gas might well be there, the technique might well be safe, but there is no guarantee we will use it.

Is the end of an energy crisis really in sight, or do the problems go much further than supply? What future do other energy sources – such as solar, wind, biofuels and even nuclear – have to play in our energy provision? Will a plentiful energy supply blind us to the need to address the concerns regarding climate change? Are there reasons to be nervous about the long-term strategic impacts that ‘quick fix’ unconventional fossil fuels provide, or should we celebrate a future free from resource shortages? With what has been called a ‘Golden Age of Gas’ now a real possibility, just how should we evaluate ‘breaking the earth’ in return for cheap energy supplies?

WATCH THE DEBATE

 

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Stephen Bull
vice president, Statoil (US onshore operations)

Fiona Harvey
environment correspondent, Guardian

Professor Hywel Thomas
pro vice-chancellor, International and Engagement, Cardiff University; fellow, Royal Academy of Engineering

Chair:
Tony Gilland
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas

Produced by
Tony Gilland associate fellow, Academy of Ideas
Recommended readings
Osborne signals shale gas tax breaks

The Treasury is consulting on a “generous new tax regime” for the emerging shale gas industry so that the UK is not left out of the worldwide dash for gas, George Osborne told the Tory conference.

Jim Pickard, Sylvia Pfeifer and Pilita Clark, Financial Times, 8 October 2012

UK dash for gas would be illegal, says climate committee

Letter from climate change committee slams government over comments suggesting unabated gas can play a role in the energy mix after 2030

James Murray, Guardian, 13 September 2012

Shale Gas to the Climate Rescue

The battle against runaway climate change is being lost. The green movement and the energy industry — while engaged in a furious debate on issues from nuclear power to oil sands — are missing the bigger picture.

Alan Riley, New York Times, 13 August 2012

An unconventional bonanza

New sources of gas could transform the world’s energy markets, says Simon Wright—but it won’t be quick or easy

Smion Wright, Economist, 14 July 2012

Shale Gas Extraction in the UK: a review of hydraulic fracturing

The health, safety and environmental risks associated with hydraulic fracturing (often termed ‘fracking’) as a means to extract shale gas can be managed effectively in the UK as long as operational best practices are implemented and enforced through regulation. Hydraulic fracturing is an established technology that has been used in the oil and gas industries for many decades. The UK has 60 years’ experience of regulating onshore and offshore oil and gas industries.

The Royal Society and the Royal Academy of Engineering, 1 June 2012

Gas prices: is the only way up?

There are plans to use more gas in future – not just in the UK but across the world. From the point of view of climate change, this would be a disaster. But given rising gas prices, it also looks like bad news for our energy bills. This briefing sets out why we need to reduce our dependence on gas – not just for environmental, but economic reasons too.

Friends of the Earth, 12 March 2012

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Social media: good? Or bad?
Social media: good? Or bad?

Saturday 20 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Conservatory

There are plenty of reasons, it seems, to champion social media. For some, it played a key role in the Arab uprisings, allowing the disparate and the silenced to give voice to their struggles. In the West, too, social media is deemed increasingly vital to public life, be it President Obama’s high-profile tweeting strategy, or influential Twitter- or Facebook-driven campaigns around certain issues. And as Facebook’s multibillion-dollar floatation showed, there is money to be made too. But is the rise of social media as great a positive force as its champions claim? Are there downsides to the social-media revolution? Is the private sphere in the process of being rendered all too public? And what about free speech? Has the rise of social media facilitated the rise of the twitchunts, and other forms of near instantaneous censure? Or are the criticisms as misplaced as the hype?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Andrew Keen
entrepreneur; founder, Audiocafe.com; author, Digital Vertigo: how today's online social revolution is dividing, diminishing, and disorienting us

Dr Norman Lewis
director (innovation), PwC; co-author, Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation

Chair:
Dr Tim Black
editor, Spiked Review

Produced by
Dr Tim Black editor, Spiked Review
Recommended readings
Twitter clash between idealism and profit

For years, the microblogging service beloved by the celebrity crowd was ridiculed for ignoring the hard question of how to make money. So what happens when Twitter finally gets serious about profits?

Richard Waters, Financial Times, 12 September 2012

Why 1984 Is Upon Us (Digital Vertigo)

For many of these supposed social-media visionaries, the death of privacy is no different, in principle, from the retirement of the horse and cart or the disappearance of gaslights from city streets.

Andrew Keen, Forbes, 23 May 2012

Welcome to the social media revolution

Connected individuals have rallied crowds, created vast audiences and toppled political establishments by communicating their message through social networks.

Marc Benioff, BBC News, 11 May 2012

Social media and the post-privacy society

Welcome to this brave new, digitally-connected world that has blown up the barriers between our public and private selves

Gary Younge, Guardian, 2 April 2012

Facebook valuation: $100 billion for what?

Yes, if FB were a country it would be the third largest. It would also be the most unproductive country ever.

Norman Lewis, spiked, 15 February 2012

It knows

There seem to be no large Google initiatives – however seemingly tangential to the company’s core competency, and unhelpful to its bottom line – that don’t bring as a side benefit, or as the main benefit, an enormous amount of data to Google.

Daniel Soar, London Review of Books, October 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Blaming troubled families: licence to parent?
Blaming troubled families: licence to parent?

Saturday 20 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Frobisher Auditorium 2

Last summer, hundreds of British children aged between 11 and 14 participated in looting shops and wantonly destroying property in UK cities. Immediately after the riots, Prime Minister David Cameron noted, ‘The question people asked over and over again was “Where are the parents?”’. He went on to assert there were 120,000 ‘troubled families’ and that he would implement a new initiative to turn these families’ lives and prospects around, warning that his government would be less sensitive than before to accusations that its intervention was ‘interfering or nannying’. A similar explanation for rioting youth was one of the key findings of the Riots, Communities and Victims panel’s report, published early in 2012. That report used different statistics, referring to 500,000 ‘forgotten families’ who ‘bump along the bottom of society’.

Some of the practical policy consequences, such as the government’s commitment to spend millions of pounds giving mums and dads Boots vouchers for parenting classes, have been derided. But many critics argued Cameron’s initiative missed the target of real problem families, favouring more effective intervention rather than opposing it in principle. There is certainly a consensus among experts and policy makers that deadbeat dads and slack mums are responsible for all sorts of anti-social behaviour. Labour MP Frank Field reports that he has travelled the length and breadth of Britain and discovered there is ‘clearly a problem of chaotic families’. When Work and Pensions Secretary Iain Duncan Smith and his think-tank, the Centre for Social Justice, called for an aggressive ‘early intervention’ programme to educate parents about how they conduct their family lives, he echoed opinion formers across the political spectrum. It is now orthodoxy that what happens in a child’s first five years stamps them indelibly for life.

With so much emphasis on what has been called ‘parental determinism’, the case for the state taking greater responsibility seems to be growing in strength. Adoption tsar Martin Narey argues that many more children should be taken into care, while documentary filmmaker Roger Graef insists that ‘undue respect for birth parents’ rights’ amounts to a harmful political correctness. Is it wrong that children should be left in problem families? Indeed, are there some people who shouldn’t be parents at all? Is it true that without intense state intervention, we can expect more rioting youth in the future? Or is it not the place of the state to decide who are good and bad parents, and dictate what are the best outcomes for children?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Sally Gimson
Labour councillor, Highgate; member, Camden Council's planning and housing committees; Camden's Equality Champion

Professor Roger Graef
CEO, Films of Record; award-winning filmmaker, including the Bafta winning Police series, Police 2001, Turning the Screws, and The Secret Policeman's Ball; visiting professor, Mannheim Centre for Criminology, LSE

Jane Sandeman
convenor, IoI Parents Forum; contributor, Standing up to Supernanny; director of finance and central services, Cardinal Hume Centre

Chair:
Alison Small
CEO, Production Guild of Great Britain

Produced by
Jane Sandeman convenor, IoI Parents Forum; contributor, Standing up to Supernanny; director of finance and central services, Cardinal Hume Centre
Recommended readings
Troubled Families progamme shows absurdity of

An example of the difficulty in trying to classify policies as left wing or right wing comes with the Government's Troubled Families programme. It is being run by Eric Pickles and shows early signs of success. It is about reducing welfare burdens on the state, tackling crime and strengthening the family. So is it right wing? It is also about about turning round the leaves of those languishing at the bottom of society rather than just passing by on the other side.

ConservativeHome, 10 October 2012

There may be ‘trouble’ ahead: what we know about those 120,000 ‘troubled’ families

Current government policy on social justice hinges on the claim that there are 120,000 ‘troubled families’ in Britain. The new Social Justice Strategy focuses almost entirely upon these.

Ruth Levitas, Poverty and Social Exclusion in the UK, 21 April 2012

These riots were not a product of permissiveness

Blaming the looting on the ‘liberal experiment’ of the 1960s is not only wrong - it could also make the real problems in urban communities worse.

Jennie Bristow, spiked, 30 August 2011

Problem families 'have too many children’

Mothers in large problem families should be “ashamed” of the damage they are doing to society and stop having children, a senior government adviser warns today.

Robert Winnett and James Kirkup, Daily Telegraph, 20 July 2011

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Foyles Festival Bookshop 2012
Foyles Festival Bookshop 2012

Saturday 20 October, 10.30am until 6.00pm, Level G

Foyles will once again run the festival bookshop, stocking books by festival speakers and other books related to the Battle of Ideas 2012 themes. As last year the expanded bookshop will include shelves to browse, seating areas to read in and author signings (look out for details at the festival).

Foyles is a Charing Cross Road institution, but in the last few years the entire shop has been refitted. It still has an unparalleled range of books at its heart, with five floor of books on 56 specialist subjects, but also features an art gallery, a café, Ray’s Jazz shop and a flourishing programme of author events. Foyles also has shops at Royal Festival Hall, St Pancras International, and Westfield London.

This year Foyles Charing Cross Road will host a Battle Satellite entitled Riots and revolutions: Europe’s young radicals? on Monday 8 October and No more heroes? Art, genius and tradition on Tuesday 16 October, as well as a Bookshop Barnie with Martin Jacques on Friday 26 October.

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Is Europe... boring?
Is Europe... boring?

Saturday 20 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Pit Theatre

The anthem of the European Union, Beethoven’s ‘Ode to Joy’, captures an historic European ideal that is hard to associate with the grey-suited bureaucrats of the contemporary EU. ‘Ode to Joy’ speaks of the excitement and sense of change – sometimes experienced with optimism, sometimes foreboding – that swept Europe after the French Revolution. Through the long nineteenth century until 1914, new nations like Germany, Italy and Greece came into existence, empires spread, Freud, Marx, Darwin and Nietzsche thought, Romantic poets dreamed. The masses entered history, fought for a better world, died in the trenches of the Great War. New waves of revolution swept crumbling empires aside, Bauhaus blossomed, Sartre and Arendt grappled with Heidegger, Einstein lectured in working men’s clubs, Joyce was in Paris, Orwell and Hemingway in Spain. Ideas mattered and history was upon us as the hammer and sickle flew over the Reichstag’s ruins.

Nearly 70 years later, one can travel without a passport from Paris to Warsaw, Copenhagen to Naples. The same currency allows one to buy Gucci and McDonalds in a reunited Berlin or a Madrid where Franco is just a memory. The European Union is the largest single economic unit in the world: its population exceeds that of the United States. It lacks the economic dynamism of America, but it is safe and, until recently, prosperous. Tourists flock to breathe in the atmosphere of the old world, to marvel at how people once lived, loved and thought, fought and died. Security and comfort are nothing to sneer at, but is something missing? Do we share a sense of being European, of holding ideals in common? Is today’s EU bound together by fear of the future rather than a love of freedom? With closer integration on the horizon – seemingly the only safe alternative – is it worth asking where today’s intellectuals and thinkers are? Weimar may have lived a brief, intense, and doomed existence but there was no doubt it burned brightly. Where is the culture, the music, the art, the philosophy, to make the European pulse quicken today? Or is it dangerous to romanticise Europe’s revolutionary past at a time when Europe potentially faces massive instability once again? Might these be vain questions as red and black flags flap on the streets of Athens once more, and Europe sits at the centre of the world’s depression?

Speakers
Dr Albena Azmanova
social philosopher, political commentator and activist; author, The Scandal of Reason: a critical theory of political judgement

Timothy Garton Ash
professor of European studies, University of Oxford; commentator; director, Free Speech Debate

Ivan Krastev
chairman of the Centre for Liberal Strategies in Sofia; permanent fellow at the Institute for Human Sciences in Vienna

Bruno Waterfield
Brussels correspondent, The Times; co-author, No Means No

Chair:
Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination

Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Recommended readings
The EU’s Nobel has come at the price of democracy

Now be against the political institution in its current form is apparently to be anti-peace as well as anti-European

Dave Bowden, Independent, 12 October 2012

A scale model of European implosion

The budgetary austerity zealously applied by Madrid has revitalised demands for independence in Barcelona. Engaged in a fiscal and economic power struggle with the central government, Catalonia is threatening to disrupt the social and regional equilibrium that underlies Spanish democracy.

José Manuel Pureza, presseurop, 2 October 2012

Do we believe in the EU?

Crisis is a good moment for an examination of conscience. If war broke out in Europe today, would anyone be willing to die for the ideas of Schuman or Monnet’s community method?

Jacek Pawlicki & Tomasz Bielecki, presseurop, 21 September 2012

The Crisis of Europe

How the Union Came Together and Why It’s Falling Apart

Timothy Garton Ash, Foreign Affairs, September 2012

The Tragedy of the European Union and How to Resolve it

I have been a fervent supporter of the European Union as the embodiment of an open society—a voluntary association of equal states that surrendered part of their sovereignty for the common good. The euro crisis is now turning the European Union into something fundamentally different.

George Soros, New York Review of Books, 12 September 2012

Only deeper European unification can save the eurozone

Europe needs a new direction. A restructuring of the eurozone, including a transfer of sovereignty, is essential to end the crisis

Jürgen Habermas, Peter Bofinger and Julian Nida-Rümelin, Guardian, 9 August 2012

The Scandal of Reason: A Critical Theory of Political Judgment

Theories of justice are haunted by a paradox: the more ambitious the theory of justice, the less applicable and useful the model is to political practice; yet the more politically realistic the theory, the weaker its moral ambition, rendering it unsound and equally useless.

Albena Azmanova, Columbia University Press, 13 April 2012

The Hungary question could strengthen the EU

Debate over Hungary's new constitution will revitalise EU institutions – as long as it focuses on politics and law, not culture

Jan-Werner Mueller, Guardian, 2 April 2012

The New Old World

The New Old World looks at the history of the European Union, the core continental countries within it, and the issue of its further expansion into Asia. It opens with a consideration of the origins and outcomes of European integration since the Second World War, and how today's EU has been theorized across a range of contemporary disciplines

Perry Anderson, Verso, 1 August 2011


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Ideas Market 2012
Ideas Market 2012

Saturday 20 October, 10.30am until 5.00pm, Level G

Come and have a coffee while browsing a range of stalls promoting ideas to get you thinking and talking – with Liberty League, Debating Matters, WORLDbytes, Manifesto Club, Young Journalists’ Academy, Academy of Ideas and more.

The Liberty League

The Liberty League is the UK’s young pro-liberty network. We work to encourage classical liberal and libertarian activism, helping to inform, develop and recruit students and young professionals by setting up and aiding existing groups committed to the defence of freedom.

We are a non-partisan organisation, with individuals and groups in our network hailing from across the political spectrum. Please come and talk to us about getting involved with the pro-liberty movement; setting up groups, attending our conferences, or simply staying informed.

WORLDbytes

A unique online Citizen TV channel set up and run by the education charity WORLDwrite. Dedicated to challenging the status quo and advancing new knowledge, the charity promotes excellence in citizen reporting and provides free film training to volunteers to make this possible. Covering the ideas and stories rarely told, without the constraints of commissioners’ whims, mainstream ratings wars or fear of upsetting conventional wisdom, WORLDbytes’ motto is ‘Don’t shout at the telly, change the message on it’.

We cover a huge range of issues but as an education charity committed to international understanding and global equality we do have some basic principles that we promote on our news channel WORLDbytes. We believe in:

  • Open Borders and celebrating more people on the planet
  • Economic growth & serious development for all globally
  • Challenging all forms of prejudice, anti-democratic and anti-human trends
  • Freedom of speech and advancing civil liberties
  • Challenging distrust, fear and intervention in everyday life
  • Supporting our peers globally managing their own affairs without foreign intervention
  • Advancing new knowledge, ideas and critical thinking

To find out how to get involved please click here or come and meet us at the Ideas Factory.

THE MANIFESTO CLUB

The Manifesto Club campaigns against the hyperregulation of everyday life. We support free movement across borders, free expression and free association. We challenge booze bans, photo bans, vetting and speech codes - all new ways in which the state regulates everyday life on the streets, in workplaces and in our private lives.

Our rapidly growing membership hails from all political traditions and none, and from all corners of the world. Come to our stall to find out more about our new brand of civil liberties campaigning – and sign up to our flagship campaign against the vetting database.

YOUNG JOURNALISTS’ ACADEMY

The Young Journalists’ Academy is a programme for London state school pupils who have the passion and the guts, but not ‘the right contacts’, to break into journalism. We run a journalism summer school in Canary Wharf along with schemes like YJA in Schools, the YJA Graduates network and training for Journalism Ambassadors. On our site (http://www.yja.org.uk) you can find out more about what we do and get some great tips and inspiration from YJA Graduates and professional journalists.

NO2ID

NO2ID is a single-issue group focussed on the threat to liberty and privacy posed by the rapid growth of the database state, of which “ID cards” were the most visible part. We are entirely independent and non-partisan.

National ID cards are gone. But the infrastructure survives as ‘biometric visas’ for foreign residents. Mass-surveillance has not disappeared. The coalition’s promises to “roll back the database state” are ineffectual. Indeed official demands for personal information are multiplying. Hence NO2ID continues in order to to oppose mass surveillance and data-sharing schemes, and to fight for enforceable privacy protections in law.

DEBATING MATTERS COMPETITION

The Academy of Ideas’ Debating Matters Competition provides an experience of engaging in rigorous, well researched and well thought through public debate to young students throughout the UK. Through establishing an environment where large numbers of schools and students benefit from the intellectual challenge posed by the Debating Matters experience, we aim to raise aspirations for educational standards more generally.

Debating Matters offers a fresh, accessible and engaging format for debating contemporary issues. With its focus on substance over style, the competition takes ideas, argument and young people seriously. One of the central tenets of Debating Matters is that young people are intelligent and robust enough to have their ideas held up to critical scrutiny. This scrutiny is provided by a panel of judges in every debate – a mixture of scientists, journalists, lawyers, businessmen, policy advisors and artists. Debating Matters judges are encouraged to be bold and to challenge the students: asking probing questions and providing honest criticism of their arguments. It is this essential interaction between students and our judges which makes Debating Matters unique.

Come and talk to us about getting involved – whether as a school, judge or a sponsor – and help us to extend the Debating Matters challenge to more young people.

JOIN THE INSTITUTE OF IDEAS

The Battle of Ideas weekend is the annual culmination of the Academy of Ideas’ ongoing project. The IoI runs a range of forums that meet monthly to discuss developments in: education, the economy, social policy, current affairs, parenting, the arts, and academia; as well as a monthly book club, a national schools debating competition (www.debatingmatters.com), and other public events. We also produce occasional publications and an award-winning online reviews magazine (www.culturewars.org.uk). IoI associates get a significant reduction on ticket prices for our events as well as other benefits. Most importantly, associates help us continue our work in expanding the boundaries of public debate.

For more information about the Academy of Ideas, contact Geoff Kidder on 020 7269 9220 or see further details here.

Session partners







in association with



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Who needs art anyway?
Who needs art anyway?

Saturday 20 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Fountain Room

The title of the Arts Council’s major 10-year vision, ‘Achieving great art for everyone’, captures the contemporary drive to increase audiences for the arts. But the associated literature reveals a palpable defensiveness. Over the past 20 years, arts institutions have become obsessed with their lack of reach. Despite the queues outside blockbuster exhibitions and the popular appeal of West End theatre, arts policymakers have worried that too many people don’t seem bothered about classical music or contemporary art, and what audiences there are seem too old, too posh, too white. Attracting ‘hard to reach’ audiences – urban youth, diverse ethnic groups, the socially excluded – has become the holy grail.

Often this mission seems less about simply making the arts affordable, for example, and more a desperate attempt to dragoon us into opera houses and museums, whether we like it or not. And the justifications for such efforts have little to do with art. It is asserted that people need the arts for the sake of their health and wellbeing, social mobility, economic prosperity, and good citizenship. We are told choirs can build community cohesion; making music can engage would-be rioters; plays can teach empathy; art-related skills make people more employable. Former culture secretary Margaret Hodge stressed the importance of the arts for ‘nurturing our sense of Britishness, of finding common identity and creating a common sense of belonging’. But how credible is this? Are those who remain cold in the face of Rembrandt, or indifferent to the beauty of Beethoven, a social problem?

Critics argue that arts organisations risk compromising their art by obsessing over audiences. After all, the simplest way to get people through the door might be to offer the familiar and unchallenging work they already know they like, rather than working to build an appreciative audience for new and difficult work. If we push the arts as a public good, do we threaten their role as a private pleasure, freely chosen? Should people be free to reject as well as to fall in love with orchestral music, sculpture, ballet? Are those who enjoy a rich and varied experience of the arts in danger of sneering at those who don’t get it? Or is there a greater danger that if we don’t ensure everyone appreciates the arts, they will become no more than a luxury for those who have the time, education and money to enjoy them?

Listen to session audio

 

Download mp3 (Right click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Stella Duffy
writer and theatre-maker; award-winning author of short stories, plays and novels

David Edgar
playwright; president of the Writers' Guild; author, How Plays Work; playwright, Written on the Heart, Pentecost

Munira Mirza
advisor on arts and philanthropy; former deputy mayor of London for education and culture; author, The Politics of Culture: the case for universalism

Andrea Rose
director, Visual Arts and Strategic Programmes, British Council; governor, University of the Arts, London; author, Gagarin in Britain

Chair:
Dr Tiffany Jenkins
writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there

Produced by
Dr Wendy Earle impact development officer, Birkbeck, University of London; convenor, Academy of Ideas Arts and Society Forum
Dr Tiffany Jenkins writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there
Recommended readings
Art for art's sake?

Can the language and tools of economics help the case for cultural sector funding? Or is culture a special case with its own rules?

Claire Donovan, Department for Culture, Media and Sport, 17 May 2012

Should art really be for its own sake alone?

If art museums are the new churches, perhaps they should end the veneration of ambiguity and start serving our inner needs

Alain de Botton, Guardian, 20 January 2012

Why should we fund the arts?

Publicly funded arts institutions are under more pressure than ever to quantify the social benefits they bring, as would be done for schools and hospitals. But isn't the crucial role of art to challenge the way society is run?

David Edgar, Guardian, 5 January 2012

The Politics of Culture: the case for universalism

In the twenty-first century, cultural policy is increasingly dominated by the politics of diversity. Cultural institutions lack confidence in their own intrinsic value and seek relevance by promoting diverse identities.

Munira Mirza, Palgrave Macmillan, 13 December 2011

For art's sake – and ours

The anti-cuts case can't be just the elitism of the arts' intrinsic value, nor their social utility, but both

David Edgar, Guardian, 30 March 2011

Art for art's sake

Is an unmade bed art? How about a saucy seaside postcard - or even a slogan T-shirt? It's art to the person who thinks it expresses their life.

Katharine Whitehorn, BBC News, 8 August 2008

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: What's wrong with equality?
What's wrong with equality?

Saturday 20 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Cinema 1 Keynote Controversies

In his State of the Union speech this year, President Obama declared that inequality is ‘the defining issue of our time’. He said everyone should get ‘a fair shot’, do ‘their fair share’ and play by ‘the same set of rules’. Such fairness, such equality, was a matter beyond politics (‘not Democratic values or Republican values, but American values’), something without which the very fabric of society was at risk. In the UK, too, Prime Minister David Cameron has railed against ‘the incredible inequality of the modern world’. Economic debates are dominated by the spectre of dangerous inequalities. From Richard Layard’s economics of happiness, with its focus on relative income and the ‘paradox of prosperity’, to the fashionable endorsement of The Spirit Level, a bestselling book by academics much cited by politicians of all parties, to the Occupy movement, it has become an orthodoxy that unequal societies do worse in education, mental health and social cohesion.

The moral force of demands to lessen economic inequality seems to derive from the historically progressive demands for political equality. Who can object to that call for equal rights, whereby groups oppressed because of their gender, race or sexuality fought for their democratic rights? But does the fairness agenda really stand in the tradition of anti-slavery, civil rights and women’s suffrage? Is demanding regulation of bankers’ pay or calling for a mansion tax of the same order as the fight against Apartheid or the decriminalisation of homosexuality? Or are we in danger of confusing what we mean by equality by conflating the economic with the political?

The origin of the modern idea that ‘All men are created equal’ lies in Thomas Jefferson’s ‘immortal declaration’ in which equality was inalienably linked to liberty as a rebuttal against authoritarian rule. And yet demands for more equality can be used against individual freedom, religious freedom, free enterprise. Equal rights for minority groups may be progressive, but what about contemporary equal opportunity policies, such as quotas, that emphasise equality of outcomes? Talent is not equally distributed: some of us are fast, some bright, some musical. Some are not. That might not be ‘fair’, but there it is: we are not all born the same. Is it fair to discriminate and handicap to level the playing field? Or does such affirmative action come at too high a price in personal freedom? Do we really want economic redistribution to the level that we all have the same? Is the importance of equality more in allowing us to be different or in allowing us to be the same? What has equality come to mean today?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Sue Christoforou
policy and research manager, The Equality Trust project, One Society; policy analyst

Thomas Hylland Eriksen
professor of social anthropology, University of Oslo; novelist; author, Ethnicity and Nationalism and Globalization: the key concepts

Joyce McMillan
chair, Hansard Society Working Group in Scotland; judge, 2010 Saltire Scottish Book of the Year Award; theatre critic, Scotsman

Brendan O'Neill
editor, spiked; columnist, Big Issue; contributor, Spectator; author, A Duty to Offend: Selected Essays

Trevor Phillips
former chair, Equality and Human Rights Commission

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Recommended readings
Does economic growth make you happy?

The case against making increased GDP per capita the overriding policy objective is that it doesn’t deliver the increased happiness or welfare if promises.

Robert Skidelsky, TLS, 28 September 2012

How Much is Enough? The Love of Money, and the Case for the Good Life

In recent years, economic growth has been regarded as a self-evident good, with political debate focussed on the best means to achieve it. But there are now signs that this shared assumption is weakening.

Robert and Edward Skidelsky, Allen Lane, 28 July 2012

Hiring hotties

When can an employer prefer the attractive over the homely?

Economist, 21 July 2012

The Price of Inequality: the avoidable causes and invisible costs of inequality

The top 1 percent have the best houses, the best educations, the best doctors, and the best lifestyles, but there is one thing that money doesn't seem to have bought: an understanding that their fate is bound up with how the other 99 percent live.

Joseph Stiglitz, Allen Lane, 28 June 2012

Methodist minister Haley Preston 'not employed by God'

Appeal Court judges have ruled the Reverend Haley Preston, of Cornwall, is employed by the Church rather than God. The Methodist Church had claimed that ministers were not ordinary employees but

BBC News, 20 December 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: One year on: assessing the state of the nation
One year on: assessing the state of the nation

Saturday 20 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Frobisher Auditorium 2

In the aftermath of widespread rioting in English cities in August 2011, responses revealed predictable fault lines among the commentariat. The tabloids wrote of feral criminality, while conservative voices suggested the legacy of the permissive Sixties explained why England was going to hell in a handcart. More radical commentators like Darra Singh, who chaired an independent inquiry, turned to familiar ‘social factors’ such as unemployment and lack of opportunities for young people. Some even saw looting as a form of protest against ‘brutal cuts’ and austerity measures. A Guardian/LSE study, Reading The Riots, concluded that the rioters were ‘rebels with a cause’, with 86 per cent of the 270 rioters interviewed claiming the violence was caused by poverty, 85 per cent policing, and 80 per cent government policies.

On closer inspection, however, the competing explanations shared certain common themes, indicting the contemporary British way of life and calling for greater state intervention to keep it in check. David Cameron claimed the violence was due to bad parenting and ‘Broken Britain’. Ed Miliband rebranded violent rioting as another expression of a ‘me first’ culture driven by hyper-consumerism. The government’s panel report slammed a wider culture of ‘materialism’, implying aggressive brand advertising has corrupted impressionable youth. ‘Britain’s riots are the consequence of a greedy society’, asserted the Guardian‘s Seumas Milne, while Peter Oborne of the Telegraph claimed the rioters were ‘just following the example set by senior and respected figures in society’. Naturally, the law‘n’order lobby argued people need stricter social and moral codes, and endorsed the ‘exemplary’ punishments handed out (six months in jail for stealing chewing gum; four years for trying unsuccessfully to start a riot through Facebook). Elsewhere, more liberal-leaning commentators called instead for parenting classes, family-therapy centres, youth clubs and so on. But might such headline-grabbing policy initiatives, whether punitive or more therapeutic, distract us from explaining what really happened and why?

How do we account for the seeming demise of social solidarity? One striking feature of the riots was the loss of the authority of adults – parents, teachers, neighbours – over younger generations. Is it really just a ‘me first’ attitude that motivates people to destroy their corner shop or burn down their neighbour’s home? Or might we ask what fuelled the looters’ inflated sense of entitlement and grievance? Might some responses to the riots have continued to foster an assertive victimhood? Might the normalisation of welfare dependency – such that people regard claiming benefits not as a temporary phase but as a way of life – be partly to blame? Might widespread evasion of these bigger issues represent a greater threat to society than the damage caused by the rioters themselves?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Professor Frank Furedi
sociologist and social commentator; author, What's Happened to the University?, Power of Reading: from Socrates to Twitter, On Tolerance and Authority: a sociological history

David Lammy MP
Labour MP for Tottenham; author, Out of the Ashes: Britain after the riots

Zoe Williams
columnist, Guardian; author, What Not to Expect When You're Expecting

Chair:
Neil Davenport
sociology and politics teacher; writer on culture; former music journalist

Produced by
Neil Davenport sociology and politics teacher; writer on culture; former music journalist
Peter Smith director of tourism, St. Mary’s University College, Twickenham, London; co-author, Volunteer Tourism: the lifestyle politics of international development
Recommended readings
David Lammy MP says absent fathers 'key cause of knife crime

A London MP has suggested that absent fathers are a key cause of knife crime.

BBC News, 3 October 2012

Reading the Riots

Investigating England's summer of disorder

Guardian, 2012

Like a bad dream

Unrest that seemed epoch-making a year ago has changed little. That is surprising—and worrying

Economist, 4 August 2012

Riot City: protest and rebellion in the capital

Since 2000, London has seen unprecedented levels of unrest. Its streets have become the battleground for a host of new demands and new ideological standpoints; its occupants, protesters and authority alike, have had to invent new tactics to cope with the pressure of street politics and advances in social media.

Clive Bloom, Palgrave Macmillan, 26 July 2012

The rioters weren’t poor automatons

Those who have concluded that the August rioters were simply reacting to deprivation are deluding themselves.

Neil Davenport, spiked, 21 December 2011

Rioting in England: was it just a bad dream?

The elite’s claim that this was just another facet of the ‘culture of greed’ shows how incapable they are of addressing urban implosion.

Frank Furedi, frankfuredi.com, 15 August 2011

The UK riots: the psychology of looting

The shocking acts of looting may not be political, but they nevertheless say something about the beaten-down lives of the rioters

Zoe Williams, Guardian, 9 August 2011

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

in association with


Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Forced marriage to faith schools: the politics of multiculturalism
Forced marriage to faith schools: the politics of multiculturalism

Saturday 20 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Frobisher 4-6

When Tory MP Aidan Burley tweeted that Danny Boyle’s Olympics 2012 Opening Ceremony was ‘leftie multicultural crap’, he was widely condemned: even his own party leader David Cameron joined in the chorus of those branding him ‘incompatible with modern Britain’. Yet in a speech in Munich in February 2011, Cameron had announced the ‘doctrine of state multiculturalism’ had failed in Britain by encouraging ‘different cultures to live separate lives… apart from the mainstream’. He aligned himself with a number of religious and political leaders arguing for ways of bringing us together in what Gordon Brown called a ‘stronger sense of patriotic purpose’. Has multiculturalism-gone-mad had its day? And, if so, is the alternative a more moderate multiculturalism or cultural conformism?

The government has recently proposed to criminalise forced marriages, claiming legislation is the only way to stamp out a foreign custom incompatible with core British values. The controversial attempt to ban the religious circumcision of young boys in Germany also caused heated debate in the UK about what freedoms should be allowed to different cultural religious groups. Even the great faith schools debate has become jumbled up with multiculturalism, as it is argued faith schools are less ethnically mixed. The BBC’s Panorama went so far as to allege Islamic schools were inculcating violent and racist beliefs in British Muslim children. Does all this represent at attack on multiculturalism, even curtailing religious freedom in the name of Britishness? After all, to take a critical perspective, marriage by definition is a voluntary union: ‘forced marriage’ is nothing other than abduction, already illegal. And aren’t religious rituals like circumcision, or a preference for religious schooling, just the sort of benign differences a confident society should be happy to tolerate?

Nevertheless, a return to old-fashioned, jingoistic Britishness, let alone Christian triumphalism, seems unlikely. When the Bishop of Oxford, John Pritchard, suggested that CofE schools should open their doors to non-Anglicans, was he not advocating indifference to religion, a uniform non-judgementalism, rather than genuine diversity? Is this the model of multiculturalism we can expect to see more of? Conformism to a liberal, secular consensus rather than a nationalistic one? Is there no room for allowing freedoms to different culture groups without endorsing their particularist identity? Or is the problem that multiculturalism has blossomed on the grave of the politics of assimilation? An answer by default to the reality of a lack of any consensus as to what it might mean to be British?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Dr Jonathan Chaplin
director, Kirby Laing Institute for Christian Ethics, Cambridge; author, Multiculturalism: a Christian retrieval

Jens-Martin Eriksen
writer, playwright and novelist; co-author, The Democratic Contradictions of Multiculturalism

Rania Hafez
programme leader, MA Education, Greenwich University; fellow, The Muslim Institute

Max Wind-Cowie
deputy director, ResPublica

Chair:
Toby Marshall
A Level Film Studies Teacher; PhD researcher in sociology of education, UCL Institute of Education

Produced by
Rania Hafez programme leader, MA Education, Greenwich University; fellow, The Muslim Institute
Toby Marshall A Level Film Studies Teacher; PhD researcher in sociology of education, UCL Institute of Education
Recommended readings
Understanding the Breivik Verdict

The mass murderer’s ideology, shared by others, poses a threat to Enlightenment values.

Jens-Martin Eriksen & Frederik Stjernfelt, City Journal, 6 September 2012

Don’t protect us from ‘forced’ marriages

The government says it wants to liberate ethnic-minority women. Actually it’s infantalising us.

Rania Hafez, spiked, 5 July 2012

Hello, world

Growth has brought foreigners, and foreigners have brought growth

Economist, 30 June 2012

Are we there yet?

A collection on race and conservatism

Max Wind-Cowie, Demos, 2011

Multiculturalism: a Christian retrieval

In our haste to reassess multiculturalism in the light of compelling recent evidence of its darker sides, we must not lose sight of its indispensable contribution to realising a just society.

Theos, 2011

The Morality of Multiculturalism

Is the fight against racism and prejudice, which also celebrates multiculturalism and the hyper diversity of our country, also an essential element of the tolerance we like to take pride in? Or is multiculturalism part of the problem?

Moral Maze, BBC, 9 February 2011

PM's speech at Munich Security Conference

Prime Minister David Cameron has delivered a speech setting out his view on radicalisation and Islamic extremism.

David Cameron, No.10 Downing Street, 5 February 2011

Culturalism: Culture as political ideology

The controversy on multiculturalism has changed the political fronts. The Left defends respect for minority cultures while the Right stands guard over the national culture. But these two fronts merely constitute two variants of a culturalist ideology

Jens-Martin Eriksen & Frederik Stjernfelt, Eurozine, 9 January 2009

Making a Difference: culture, race and social policy

Ironically, the idea of cultural diversity has captured the political imagination just as anthropologists themselves have started worrying about the concept. They have come to realise not just that the notion of cultural diversity is not self-evidently good but also that the concept of culture is not self-evident.

Kenan Malik, kenanmalik.com, December 2005

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Religious or Spiritual or Neither?
Religious or Spiritual or Neither?

Saturday 20 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Conservatory

Statistics for regular church attendance – in decline for the past 50 years and still declining – suggest the British have little enthusiasm for formal religious practice, especially compared with North Americans, for example. Many people instead describe themselves as ‘spiritual but not religious’. What does this mean? Is it a half-baked, DIY, mix-and-match mishmash, or is it driving at something deeper? In any case, doesn’t the prevalence of this attitude suggest that the spiritual drive is alive and well; that the search for ultimate meaning and purpose is part of many people’s make-up? If it is, can we understand this in purely naturalistic terms (psychological, biological or social)? Or is it evidence of a ‘divine sense’ implanted in us? Or does it point to something else – perhaps precious, yet impossible to state in clear terms? Would it be right to call this ‘religious sensibility’ and to say that, even if old-fashioned religious practice has declined, belief has not?

For many people, there persists the soothing idea of an English God who turns up on Sundays, maintains a low-key presence and is careful not to outstay his welcome (as described by the philosopher Roger Scruton). For some agnostics and ‘liberal’ Christians, this embodies the compromise with the secular world that religious sensibilities ought to seek. Meanwhile, for some, religion is a cultural practice rather than a matter of dogma or faith. In particular, Judaism, Hinduism and Sikhism and even Protestantism in its Anglican form can be seen more as cultural practices than dogmas. In branding religion as an irrational set of ideas, do we neglect the succour people find in the ritual and traditional aspects of temple, church and mosque?

Do campaigning atheists, characterising religion as ‘evil’, miss the point of an innate propensity for faith? Do we all yearn to be touched by the miraculous, to apprehend something beyond day-to-day reality? Is there is a religion-shaped hole in our hearts? Is this why religious themes continue to occupy a prominent place on the public agenda, even as religious practice declines?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Dr Piers Benn
philosopher; author, Commitment and Ethics; visiting lecturer in ethics, Heythrop College, London and Fordham University, New York

Andrew Copson
chief executive, British Humanist Association

Dolan Cummings
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)

Elizabeth Oldfield
director, Theos, religion and society think-tank

Linda Woodhead
professor, sociology of religion, Lancaster University; author, The Spiritual Revolution: why religion is giving way to spirituality

Chair:
Helen Birtwistle
history and politics teacher, South London school

Produced by
Dr Piers Benn philosopher; author, Commitment and Ethics; visiting lecturer in ethics, Heythrop College, London and Fordham University, New York
Helen Birtwistle history and politics teacher, South London school
Recommended readings
Can you be spiritual and not religious?

As religious observance is on the wane, people's desire to connect at some higher level faces a quest for new forms

Piers Benn, Independent, 12 October 2012

My Take: 'I'm spiritual but not religious' is a cop-out

The increasingly common refrain that

Alan Miller, CNN, 29 September 2012

Britain's 'last witch': Campaign to pardon Helen Duncan

Campaigners looking to clear the name of Britain's last convicted witch may apply for a judicial review.

BBC News, 15 June 2012

Politicians still don't

Sixty years has passed since Gandhi said “those who say religion has nothing to do with politics do not know what religion is”, but many of those most interested in politics still do not know.

Theos, 24 January 2012

Commitment (The Art of Living Series)

In this work, Piers Benn delves into the relationship between commitment and meaningful life, and asks whether commitment must be based on truth to provide such meaning. He also explores obstacles to commitment such as boredom, sloth and indifference. Drawing on his own experience of dithering and procrastination, he suggests that a sceptical, cautious attitude to important matters can both be a virtue, and a real obstacle to human fulfilment.

Piers Benn, Acumen Publishing, 23 November 2011

Doing good is not the preserve of the religious

The link between religion and social participation is a fiction – but we must concentrate on shared civic principles, not the divide

Andrew Copson, Guardian, 26 September 2011

Count me out of atheism's creed

The desire to belong has made atheism into its own religion. But non-belief is no basis for a group identity.

Dolan Cummings, spiked, 25 October 2007

The Spiritual Revolution: Why Religion is Giving Way to Spirituality

Comparing existing evidence from the USA and Europe, with a UK–based study of religion and spirituality, this fascinating book addresses the most pressing question in the study of religion today: are new forms of spirituality overtaking traditional forms of religion?

Paul Heelas, Linda Woodhead, Benjamin Seel, Bronislaw Szerszynski & Karin Tusting, Wiley-Blackwell, 4 November 2004

Modern Spiritualism

The Modern Spiritualist movement dates from 1848 when the Fox sisters of Hydesville, New York produced knocking sounds that were alleged to be messages from a spirit. Spiritualists communicate with the spirits of people who have died.

BBC

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Manufacturing: the great comeback?
Manufacturing: the great comeback?

Saturday 20 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Garden Room

Manufacturing has long been argued to be the heart of any modern economy. It produces valuable exports, boosts the balance of trade, provides skilled jobs and generates even more jobs in supporting service sectors. Yet many developed economies have seen the weight of manufacturing in their economies decrease since the 1970s, relative to services and finance. In Britain, the service sector today arguably is the economy. Since the financial crisis hit, however, there have been many calls for a ‘rebalancing’ of the economy towards making things again, towards production and away from consumption. Is it realistic or desirable that Britain tries to emulate Germany’s famous ‘Mittelstand’ of export-led medium-sized firms, and its engineering prowess?

John Cridland of the CBI has called for banks and government to support Britain’s own ‘Midlandstand’ while Blue Labour’s Maurice Glasman argues for reforms on the German model: workers’ representation on company boards and vocational training. In short, an industrial policy. And Britain still has real strengths in sectors like aerospace, robotics, pharmaceuticals and automobiles. Already this year Jaguar Land Rover has announced plans to generate 4,500 manfacturing and engineering jobs. Weaker sterling and higher Chinese wages coupled with a desire to keep supply chains closer to home also bring hope to some that British manufactures might sail the seas once more. American manufacturing has bounced back since 2008, led by the likes of General Electric, Procter & Gamble and Hewlett-Packard. Today the talk is of ‘reshoring’ not ‘offshoring’. Germany though has seen its share of industrial production fall. German business also benefits from wages that have stayed low, while its exports have been boosted by a low Euro. Some criticise Germany for a ‘beggar-thy-neighbour’ policy of allowing its exports to dominate the European single market when it should be encouraging greater domestic consumption. China too is advised to produce less and consume more. That might simply be a matter of better balance, but there is also a wider backdrop of criticism to the idea of making things: the arguments that natural, particularly mineral, resources are scarce; that factories pollute.

Can Britain reengineer its economy towards production for export again? Could new technologies like 3D printing move from the level of the hobbyist to usher in a new industrial revolution? How could such a shift even be brought about in an economy where businesses still seem reluctant to invest, where the banks won’t lend, and government, despite being a safe haven in the bond markets, seems to lack the will power to drive through sweeping changes in infrastructure that might support a manufacturing surge? Just what is the right balance to strike when it comes to the question of making stuff?

Listen to session audio:

 

Download mp3 (Right-click and choose “Save link as”)

Speakers
Andrew Bergbaum
director, AlixPartners; manufacturing industry consultant

Peter Marsh
manufacturing editor, Financial Times; author, The New Industrial Revolution: consumers, globalization and the end of mass production

James Matthews
management consultant; founding member, NY Salon; writer on economics and business

Mike Wright
executive director, Jaguar Land Rover

Chair:
Martyn Perks
digital business consultant and writer; co-author, Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation

Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Martyn Perks digital business consultant and writer; co-author, Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation
Recommended readings
Bloodhound land speed rocket test roars over Newquay

A British team building a car capable of driving beyond 1,000mph has tested the vehicle's rocket engine.

Jonathan Amos, BBC News, 3 October 2012

China is losing its manufacturing lead

China’s attraction as a global manufacturing base has not worn off yet, but several developments are chipping it away.

George Magnus, Financial Times, 13 September 2012

The US economy may surprise us all

A housing revival, the revolution occurring in energy, a rejuvenated banking system and a leaner industrial base could lead to US growth beyond the 2.5 per cent rate that is widely seen as its long-term potential.

Roger Altman, Financial Times, 4 September 2012

Comeback kid

America’s economy is once again reinventing itself

Economist, 14 July 2012

The New Industrial Revolution: consumers, globalization and the end of mass production

The rapid emergence of China and India as prime locations for low-cost manufacturing has led some analysts to conclude that manufacturers in the "old economies" - the U.S., U.K., Germany, and Japan - are being edged out of a profitable future. But if countries that have historically been at the forefront of events in manufacturing can adapt adroitly, opportunities are by no means over.

Peter Marsh, Yale University Press, 25 May 2012

Is 3D printing the key to Utopia?

The 'magic' of digital manufacturing could transform our homes and the industries that serve them. But at what cost?

John Naughton, Guardian, 13 May 2012

Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Battle of Ideas 2012 welcome address
Battle of Ideas 2012 welcome address

Saturday 20 October, 10.00am until 10.20am, Cinema 1

The eighth annual Battle of Ideas festival will open with a Welcome Address hosted by Claire Fox, Director of the Academy of Ideas.

Read Academy of Ideas Director Claire Fox’s introductory essay to the Battle of Ideas 2012.

Speakers
Sean Gregory
director, Creative Learning, Barbican/Guildhall School of Music & Drama

Alison Sharpe
head of Thought Leadership, PwC

Professor Raymond Tallis
fellow, Academy of Medical Sciences; author, philosopher, critic and poet; recent books include NHS SOS and Aping Mankind; chair, Healthcare Professionals for Assisted Dying

Mike Wright
executive director, Jaguar Land Rover

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive

Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Ink inc. Have tattoos become too mainstream?
Ink inc. Have tattoos become too mainstream?

Sunday 21 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Hammerson Room

According to a recent Channel 4 documentary, the UK is now the most tattooed nation in Europe. But what if anything do tattoos mean? Native American tribes continue to use them as a means of social recognition, while for criminals in Honduras they represent gang affiliation, and some Maori groups in New Zealand use them as an expression of both. But it sometimes seems the proliferation of tattoos here in Britain has led to them becoming devoid of meaning altogether.

Despite their preponderance, we do still have an ambiguous relationship with tattoos. On the one hand the Metropolitan Police recently announced it will ban bobbies from sporting them in public, and tabloid eyebrows were raised at ladies revealing their tattoos at Ascot, but on the other, we’re fascinated by SamCam’s inky ankle. From this voyeuristic relationship comes a number of probing questions; can tattoos ever be art or are they merely a form of self abuse? Should public servants be asked to cover them up? And does having a tattoo still imply anything countercultural? Or is it now more mainstream than not having one?

Speakers
Niall Crowley
freelance designer and writer

Jason Walsh
journalist; foreign correspondent, CS Monitor

Chair:
Ed Noel
teacher; former schools and alumni coordinator, Debating Matters Competition

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Devils in our midst? The Savile scandal and our culture of mistrust
Devils in our midst? The Savile scandal and our culture of mistrust

Saturday 20 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Hammerson Room

Since the first accusations of child abuse were made against the late Sir Jimmy Savile at the start of the month, the scandal has dominated media coverage and public debate. But while allegations continue to emerge against this one specific celebrity, the scandal seems to have expanded into a full scale national hunt for other ‘blood-curdling child catchers’. And the finger-pointing is not confined to alleged abusers themselves. Others have been condemned, such as those who had suspicions or heard rumours but said nothing (such as Esther Rantzen), or those who didn’t know what was happening but should have done (such as the charities Savile worked closely with). The BBC and NHS hospitals stand accused of complicity by failing to act. Various internal inquiries have been set up, but the bandwagon is still gathering pace, with demands from Labour for one big public inquiry. Beyond that, there are calls to purge a perceived culture of groping and sexist behaviour in the workplace, with page 3 pin-ups and uncouth sexual mores seemingly left over from the 1970s.

Are we witnessing the emergence of a a climate of hysteria that has little to do with the actual facts? Is justice served when the dead are dubbed guilty regardless of the fact they cannot be tried? Will the legacy of Savile be a heightened culture of mistrust and anxiety? When one broadsheet proclaims Savile was ‘the devil who tries, and succeeds, in passing himself off as a saint’, is there a danger that we assume there are devils everywhere, and anyone interested in charity work with children or the vulnerable is really just grooming potential victims?  How do we retain a sense of proportion without trivialising serious instances of sexual exploitation of the young?

Speakers
Professor Frank Furedi
sociologist and social commentator; author, What's Happened to the University?, Power of Reading: from Socrates to Twitter, On Tolerance and Authority: a sociological history

Chair:
Dr Ellie Lee
reader in social policy, University of Kent, Canterbury; director, Centre for Parenting Culture Studies

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: What is higher education about and who should pay for it?
What is higher education about and who should pay for it?

Wednesday 17 October, 7.00pm until 8.30pm, Room 34, Ground Floor, Institute for Art Theory and Media Studies, ELTE Muzeum krt. 6-8. Budapest, Hungary

Throughout Europe, university education is subject to a growing number of intense challenges. Often viewed as a costly luxury by governments preoccupied with economic recession, academics are told that an ivory-tower pursuit of truth is an old-fashioned, unaccountable, and self-indulgent posture. In this context, utilitarian and short-term outcomes are prioritised over the long-term and open-ended goal of knowledge for its own sake. What is the point of research grants for philosophy or sociology, scholars are asked, if they don’t contribute to increasing GDP or demonstrate any useful ‘impact’ on society?

In the UK, the government has made employability a requirement of all courses, from medieval history to moral philosophy, and proof of impact is required for state-funded research. In Hungary, the government believes the country’s future depends on professionals in science and technology, and views qualifications in social sciences, law and economics as being of little value. The new higher-education law means only 250 places for economics and 100 for law will be subsidised, as opposed to thousands in engineering and the sciences. Critics say this could place non-technical education beyond the reach of all but the wealthy. Similar concerns are voiced in the UK, where students now need to pay up to £9,000 towards their fees: many commentators fear that at in a time of recession and declining personal incomes, enrolment numbers may drop sharply.

The effects of such changes are unpredictable. In Hungary, far from halting the brain-drain, might it increase the number of students leaving to be educated abroad? In both countries, is there a risk that students will now see the acquisition of knowledge as a consumer good subject to demands for quality of service and ‘value for money’? How will the idea that the ‘customer knows best’ affect the integrity of academic judgement and the traditional professor-pupil model? And what about academic freedom from state intrusion? Must the university simply become a machine for handing out pieces of paper, tickets to join the job queues? Or is it naïve to think that the university can still make an argument for the intrinsic value of knowledge and convince the public, the tax-payer, of its virtues? Just what are universities for, for whom, and who should pay for them?

Speakers
Gábor Bojár
founder, Aquincum Institute of Technology; entrepreneur

Professor Katalin Farkas
professor, Central European University, Budapest; author, The Subject's Point of View

Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination

Réka Kinga Papp
social video programme manager, Green Spider Foundation; co-founder, Hallgatoi Halozat, student activist group

GM Tamás
visiting professor, Central European University; author, Les Idoles de la Tribu

Chair:
Dr Tim Black
editor, Spiked Review

Produced by
Dr Anna Gács associate professor, Institute for Art Theory and Media Studies, ELTE
Dr Ferenc Hammer associate professor, Institute for Art Theory and Media Studies, ELTE, Budapest
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Recommended readings
Don't give up the day job to help them secure day jobs

Scholar bemoans impact of employability agenda on academic standards. Matthew Reisz reports

Matthew Reisz, Times Higher Education, 11 October 2012

The university: still dead

Andrew Delbanco’s insightful new book on the history and future of the American college exposes an institution that has no idea what it should be.

Angus Kennedy, spiked, 25 May 2012

Get in shape: lose the fat

Clive Bloom sheds few tears for Middlesex's strangely underpopulated philosophy department - or any other corners of an academy short on recruits and long overdue for the axe. He argues that to save money and raise standards, the weakest institutions must close

Clive Bloom, Times Higher Education, 29 June 2010

From Communism to Bologna: The Emerging Crisis of Hungarian Universities

Today’s situation in Hungarian higher education displays the problems of transition from a model considered to be outdated by the European Union to a new structure.

Eszter Bartha, Universities in Crisis, 27 May 2010

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: No more heroes? Art, genius and tradition
No more heroes? Art, genius and tradition

Tuesday 16 October, 6.30pm until 8.30pm, Foyles Charing Cross Road

The German composer Robert Schumann praised the Polish composer Frederic Chopin’s early works, calling him a genius and lauding the music’s ‘intense nationalism’. But, Schumann wrote, ‘Art requires more. The minor interests of the soil on which he was born had to sacrifice themselves to the universal ones.’ And Chopin’s later works are indeed said to edge further and further towards this internationalist style. But can we think in terms of artistic universals today? Is greatness conceivable in local or national terms, or global ones? What are contemporary artists aiming to achieve, and is it for everyone?

It’s easy to look at the contemporary arts and bemoan a lack of greatness or ambition. How can we compare a light going on and off to a painting by Rembrandt? New classical music seems ghettoised and unappealing to the general public, and jazz is perhaps also shutting itself off from new audiences. But can we speak of a decline without endorsing a Schumannesque belief in universalism – if art has changed its scope, is this defeatism or progress? Furthermore, from where do artists themselves draw inspiration? Do the masterpieces of the canon inspire fresh work, or does their continual presence stifle creativity? Now that even avant-gardism seems to have run its course, are new works forever in a grim dialogue with the great remains of former, better artistic times?

In any case, Tate Modern audiences are growing ever higher, after all, and there is plenty of interest as well for ‘blockbuster’ exhibitions of past greats. But will the emerging artists today provoke the same level of reverence as their predecessors do today in coming centuries? And is it really the art of the past that we love so much, or the stories and mythology which surround them? Either way, there is no stopping efforts at broadening the artistic canon’s cultural reach, in music as much as visual art – from worldwide opera broadcasts from the Met, to Venezuela’s vaunted music programme El Sistema taking Western classical music as an agent for social change. Can we call efforts to bring the arts to all classes and cultures a noble sort of universalism – or is it just globalisation? Finally, what does it really mean to live in a world with such an obsession with the art of the past, in all its greatness? Does looking back stop us looking forward? Where are today’s Schumanns – or do we even need any?

Speakers
Manick Govinda
head, artists' advisory services; producer, Artsadmin; vice chair, a-n The Artists Information Company

Fisun Güner
freelance writer; visual arts editor, The Arts Desk

Paul Kilbey
music critic; reviews editor, Bachtrack

Sara Radstone
artist; tutor, HE Diploma in Fine and Applied Arts (Ceramics), The City Lit, London

Chris Sharp
contemporary music programmer, Barbican Centre; formerly, managing director, independent label 4AD

Dave Wybrow
director, Cockpit Theatre

Chair:
David Bowden
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer

Produced by
David Bowden associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer
Paul Kilbey music critic; reviews editor, Bachtrack
Recommended readings
Am I the only fan of modern classical music?

People expect melody and emotion from their music; but just because modern classical doesn't conform to this doesn't make it worthless

Paul Kilbey, Independent, 12 October 2012

The Classic Brits are Not What's Wrong With Classical Music

Classical music is obsessed with the past to the point that it believes in its own death - or at least it's sufficiently concerned about its health to feel threatened by an event as irrelevant as the Classic Brits.

Paul Kilbey, Huffington Post, 9 October 2012

At last: the Classic Brit Awards exposed as a sickening crime against classical music

The truth is that there is simply no need to go down the Classic Brit route. What you are in effect saying with this monstrous spectacle is that Joe Public is too uncultured, too dense, too stupid to deal with an unedited, beautifully played Chopin mazurka, Mendelssohn concerto or Beethoven sonata.

James Rhodes, Daily Telegraph, 8 October 2012

Bach Is Still Revving Up Engine of Musical Innovation Anthony Tommasini, New York Times, 7 October 2012

The pernicious rise of “indie-classical”

If you think classical music is snobbish, just take a look at indie culture.

En Liang Khong, New Statesman, 23 July 2012

Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2012 | session: Syria: the roots of the conflict and the road ahead
Syria: the roots of the conflict and the road ahead

Saturday 20 October, 1.30pm until 2.45pm, Hammerson Room

The ongoing crisis in Syria shows no signs of abating after nearly 18 months of fighting. We appear to have reached an impasse, and a long and protracted civil war seems likely. The precise origins of the conflict remains unclear, however, and there is also uncertainty about the role of the international community and the UN, as well as the regional dynamics. Can we still consider this to be a battle between the civilian Syrian population and a despotic regime, in light of the fact that armed foreign fighters are now involved? Who is fighting and what are they fighting for: was it ever simply a battle for freedom and democracy? What effect have the actions or inaction of the international community had ? Is it time to intervene militarily, and if so, to what end? And what are the likely consequences?

Speakers
Dr Tara McCormack
lecturer in international politics, University of Leicester; author, Critique, Security and Power: the political limits to emancipatory approaches

Karl Sharro
architect; writer; Middle East commentator; co-author, Manifesto: Towards a New Humanism in Architecture

Chair:
Anwar Oduro-Kwarteng
promotions manager, Academy of Ideas; writer on politics and ideology

Rebirth of the author?

"The Battle of Ideas does what it says on the tin, providing a rare platform for a robust exchange of views on some of the biggest issues facing our world at a time when it is desperately needed"
Wes Streeting, chief executive, Helena Kennedy Foundation

follow the Academy of Ideas